Ɗaukaka Ga Allah - Family Radio Worldwide
Ɗaukaka Ga Allah - Family Radio Worldwide
Ɗaukaka Ga Allah - Family Radio Worldwide
You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
HAROLD CAMPING/FAMILY RADIO<br />
<strong>Ɗaukaka</strong><br />
<strong>Ga</strong> <strong>Allah</strong>
<strong>Ɗaukaka</strong> <strong>Ga</strong> <strong>Allah</strong><br />
(Hausa: To God Be The Glory)<br />
Harold Camping<br />
<strong>Family</strong> Stations, Inc.<br />
Oakland, California, 94621 U.S.A.<br />
Internet: www.familyradio.com<br />
06-22-09<br />
ii
<strong>Ɗaukaka</strong> <strong>Ga</strong> <strong>Allah</strong><br />
Abinda Ke Ciki<br />
GABATARWA.........................................................................................v<br />
Sura Ta Ɗaya: Abin mamaki da ya shafi sanin gaskiya.......................... 1<br />
Sura ta Biyu: Rashin sahihancin fahimtar Shirin Shari’a irin ta fuskar<br />
al’ada ...................................................................................... 7<br />
Ina jinƙan <strong>Allah</strong>? ..................................................................... 10<br />
Ƙaunar mutum ga mutum....................................................... 13<br />
Sura Ta Uku: <strong>Allah</strong> Alƙalin dukan duniya ........................................... 22<br />
Tsarin shari’a Na <strong>Allah</strong> ........................................................... 25<br />
Menene jahannama? ............................................................... 27<br />
Ƙorama Ta Wuta..................................................................... 27<br />
Mai Arziki da la"azaru............................................................. 31<br />
Sura Ta Huɗu: Yaushe ne Kristi ya mutu? ........................................... 36<br />
Ya ƙare................................................................................... 41<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>fara mai ban al"ajibi ........................................................... 43<br />
Sura ta Biyar:Shirin <strong>Allah</strong> na hukunci ................................................. 44<br />
Waɗanda ba zaɓɓaɓu ba da suka mutu kafin ranar shari’a...... 48<br />
Zaɓɓaɓu waɗanda ba a cece su ba tukuna .............................. 49<br />
Waɗanda aka ceta kuma yanzu haka suna nan Zaune a wannan<br />
duniyar .................................................................................. 49<br />
Waɗanda ba zaɓɓaɓu ba da suke da rai har ranar 21 ga watan<br />
Mayu 2011............................................................................. 50<br />
Tashin mattatun da ba su da ceto........................................... 50<br />
Masu bi suna Shari’anta Marasa Ceto<br />
Yaƙin Armageddon................................................................. 54<br />
Takaitawa............................................................................... 57<br />
Kowanne ido zai ganshi.......................................................... 61<br />
Sura Ta Shida: Masarautar da aka ƙirƙiro domin nuna ɗaukaka<br />
da hikimar Kristi ................................................................................ 65<br />
iii
Zaɓɓaɓu: Mutane miliyan 200 .................................................70<br />
Miliyoyin mutane da basu da ceto sun mutu ba tare da sanin<br />
fushin <strong>Allah</strong> ba........................................................................72<br />
Sura Ta Bakwai: Ceto........................................................................ 80<br />
Jerin Ayoyi da shafi .......................................................................... 84<br />
iv
GABATARWA<br />
Wannan litafin ƙarin bayani ne kan littafin nan Mun Kusa Kai <strong>Ga</strong><br />
Ƙarshe. A cikin littafin nan Mun Kusa Kai <strong>Ga</strong> Ƙarshe, mun iya ƙoƙari,<br />
tare da taimakon <strong>Allah</strong>, nuna cewa Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya koyar da<br />
sahihancin cewa farkon ranar shari’a wanda ya zo daidai da ranar<br />
fyaucewa wato ranar 21 ga Mayu 2011. <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayar da wannan<br />
bayanin mai ban mamaki gare mu kamar yadda ya alkawarta <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
faɗa a cikin Littafin Mai-Wa’azi sura 8:5-6 cewa:<br />
‘‘...Zuciyar mai hikima kuwa ta kan gane kwanakin da shari’a<br />
kuma a kowane dalili akwai lokaci da shari’a...”<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya ɓoye wannan bayanin lokaci da shirin <strong>Allah</strong> na shari’a<br />
daga dukan ’yan adam har da Ikklisiya dukan tsawon zamanin Ikklisiya.<br />
Bugu da ƙari <strong>Allah</strong> ya bar bayani a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki wanda ya<br />
koyar da cewa Kristi zai dawo kamar ɓarawo da dare. Wannan ya faru ne<br />
domin Ikkilisiya ta maida hankali a kan kai bishara a cikin duniya. (duba<br />
Ayyukan Manzanni 1:6-8).<br />
Da yake bayani game da lokaci yana da alaƙa da shirin shari’ar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>. An yiwa shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> munmunar fahimta cikin shekaru<br />
1,955 na zamanin Ikklisiya. Duk da haka nufin <strong>Allah</strong> ne cikin wannan<br />
lokaci na ƙarshen duniya, masu bi na gaskiya zasu faɗakar da duniya<br />
game da tsarin lokaci na <strong>Allah</strong> da kuma niyar sa ta hallaka duniya. Ya ba<br />
masu bi na gaskiya cikakken bayani game da lokacin ƙarshen duniya<br />
domin dangantakar da ke tsakanin jadawalin <strong>Allah</strong> da kuma abin<br />
mamaki da zai faru da kuma shari’a,. Ya kuma ba masu bi na gaskiya<br />
cikakken bayani saboda kamar yadda Nuhu da Yunana suka yi, za su<br />
gargaɗi duniya game da hukunci mai zuwa.<br />
Wannan wahayi na ƙarshen zamani da shari’a, shaida ce ta<br />
ƙaunar <strong>Allah</strong> da jinƙansa da bashi misaltuwa. Mutane nawa ne a garin<br />
Nineva suka yi kuka suka roƙi <strong>Allah</strong> domin jinƙai inda annabi Yunana<br />
yace kawai wata rana <strong>Allah</strong> na Isra’ila zai hallaka su sabili da muguntar<br />
su? Mutane nawa ne a cikin Ikklisiya suke kuka ga <strong>Allah</strong> domin jinƙansa<br />
sabili da an koya masu cewa wata rana Kristi zai dawo kamar ɓarawo da<br />
dare? A hakikanin gaskiya koyaswar cewa Kristi zai dawo kamar ɓarawo<br />
da dare, koyaswa ce marar tada hankali. Zamanin Ikklisiya ya fara ne<br />
shekaru 1,900 da suka wuce, kuma Kristi bai zo domin ya kawo ƙarshen<br />
duniya ba. Saboda haka zamu yi tunani cewa ba lallai zai zo a<br />
zamaninmu ba. Ko suna sane da shi ko babu, mutanen cikin Ikklisiyai<br />
kimanin mutane biliyan biyu, sun shiga ƙaunar wannan duniyar. Sai dai<br />
domin abubuwa kamar yaƙi da aloba, duniyar nan wurin zama ne mai<br />
daɗi. A nan ne ’yan adam zasu sami abokai da farin ciki da aiki da jin<br />
daɗi da abin dogaro ga kai, da dai sauran su. Duniyar nan ba cikakka ba<br />
ce, amma babu shakka mutane zasu gwammace su zauna a cikin ta da<br />
v
su mutu su rasa dukan abinda ke cikinta. Saboda ba za su so suyi<br />
tunanin cewa wannan duniya zata ƙare ba.<br />
Saboda haka, idan ba masu bi na gaskiya da <strong>Allah</strong> ya sanar da<br />
ainihin lokacin da duniya zata ƙare ba, da kuma masu bi da suka<br />
gaskanta da dukan zuciyarsu cewa gaskiya ne kuma daidai ne, sauran<br />
mutanen duniya zasu dage a kan cewa ko dai Kristi zai zo kamar ɓarawo<br />
da dare ko kuma duniya bazata ƙare ba mundin ɗan adam yana warware<br />
wasu matsalolin ɗumamar yanayi da sauransu.<br />
Waɗanda zasu karanta wannan littafi kuma su yaba kawai sune<br />
waɗanda suka dogara ga <strong>Allah</strong> kuma suka yi la’akari da cewa babbar<br />
albarka da jinƙan <strong>Allah</strong> ne da yake bada wannan bayani ga waɗanda suka<br />
dogara Littafi Mai-Tsarki da gaskiya. Saboda haka muna kyakkyawan<br />
bada shawara ga mai karanta wannan littafi da ya karanta Mun Kusa Kai<br />
<strong>Ga</strong> Ƙarshe! Ana iya samun waɗannan littatafai duka kyauta daga FAMILY<br />
RADIO mai bukata zai iya rubutowa zuwa ga FAMILY RADIO OAKLAND<br />
CALIFONIA,94621,USA. ko kuma ya kira wannan lamba 1-9800-543-<br />
1495 kyauta. Za a kuma iya samunsu a shafin yanan gizo a:<br />
www.familyradio.com<br />
vi
SURA TA ƊAYA<br />
Abu Mai Sarƙaƙiya <strong>Ga</strong>me Da <strong>Ga</strong>skiya<br />
Tunanin mutum da abinda ya yi imani a kai ya ta’alaƙa kan<br />
abinda ya ɗauka a matsayin gaskiya da kuma madogara. Ya yiwu an<br />
gabatar mashi da waɗannan ra’ayoyin a lokutan baya, ko kuma waɗansu<br />
ra’ayoyi ne da aka gabatar da su ayau. Idan aka sami sababbin ra’ayoyi,<br />
za a tankaɗe, a auna bisa ra’ayoyin da ya ɗauka a matsayin gaskiya ya<br />
kuma amince da su.<br />
Hakika, lamarin ke nan yayin da ake batun fahimta irin ta addini.<br />
Da zaran mun koyi waɗansu ra’ayoyi na addini, muka kuma amince da<br />
su, yakan zama da wuya a sake karɓar wani ra’ayi a matsayin gaskiya,<br />
yana da wuya mu karɓi wani ra’ayi a matsayin gaskiya da ya saɓawa<br />
ra’ayoyin da muka riga muka yi imani da su a matsayin gaskiya.<br />
Ta haka wanda ya sami horaswa ta Katolika zai ci gaba da rayuwa<br />
a matsayain ɗan ikilisiyar Kotolika, Baftis kuma Baftis, haka ma mai<br />
addinin Buda, da dai sauransu. Dalili ke nan da ya sa yawancin waɗanda<br />
suka yi zurfi a cikin ikilisiya ba zasu yarda da cewa <strong>Allah</strong> ya gama da<br />
Ikkilisiyoyi ba, ya kuma umurci mutane su fita daga ikkilisiyai, kana an<br />
ɗora shaiɗan ya yi mulki a can, kuma Ruhu Mai-Tsarki ya watsar da<br />
ikilisiyoyi saboda haka babu wanda yake ƙarƙashin ikon ikkilisiya da zai<br />
tsira.<br />
An yita yiwa waɗannan mutanen koyaswa, kuma sun amince da<br />
wannan a matsayin gaskiya da cewa, ikilisiyoyin su, na <strong>Allah</strong> ne kuma<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ne yake mulki a bisan ta. Saboda haka ƙofofin jahannama ba za su<br />
rinjayeta ba. Wannan fahimta, ta sami wurin zama daram a cikin tunanin<br />
su, a matsayin gaskiya ba ja. Saboda haka, duk wata fahimta da za a<br />
gabatar masu daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki sai an auna ta bisa ga fahimtarsu<br />
da kuma tauhidi, wanda suka yi imani da cewa ita ce sahihiyar gaskiya.<br />
Idan ka gabatar masu da sababin ra’ayoyi daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki<br />
da ke koyarwa cewa mun zo ƙarshen zamani ikklisiya, ba za su yi<br />
nazarin batun da zuciya ɗaya ba. Komi zurfin fafatun da suke yi cewa a<br />
shirye suke su karɓi gaskiyar Littafi Mai-Tsarki, amma a zahiri, basu iya<br />
zuwa ga sanin wannan sabuwar gaskiyar ba. Dalili ke nan da ya sa a<br />
zamaninmu, mutane ƙalilan ne suke barin ikilisiyoyi bisa ga biyayya da<br />
umurni da <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayar da a guje masu.<br />
Wannan lamarin ya kasance wani abu dake da sarƙaƙiyar gaske a<br />
zamanin mu , domin waɗansu muhimman dalilai guda uku kamar haka:<br />
1. Muna zama a cikin duniya da take dab da ƙarshe. Kuma a<br />
ƙarshen zamani <strong>Allah</strong> ya shirya ya ɗauke hatimin da ya sanya<br />
kan bayanai masu yawa game da ƙarshen zamani da ke cikin<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Saboda haka mu sa rai cewa za a sake<br />
1
nazarin muhimman bayanai daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki da muke<br />
tsammani gaskiya ne .<br />
2. Muna cikin zamani na ƙarshe da ake kira zamanin ƙunci mai-<br />
tsanani, lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> yake gwada waɗanda suke kitan<br />
kansu masu bi na gaskiya. Halin mai-bi na gaskiya shine<br />
yana son ya zama mai gaskiya da biyayya da kowane abu<br />
dake cikin Littafi Mai-Ttsarki.<br />
3. Ta wajen waɗannan jarrabawar, <strong>Allah</strong> zai raba Alkama wato<br />
masu bi na gaskiya daga zawan, waɗanda suka amince da<br />
cewa su masu bi na gaskiya ne, amma ba su sami ceto ba.<br />
Lokacin jarrabawa ya ƙunshi, dukan kwanaki 8,400, (shekaru 23)<br />
lokacin ƙunci mai-tsanani wanda zai fara daga 21 ga watan Mayu<br />
shekata ta 1988, wanda ya ci gaba har zuwa 21 ga Mayu shekara ta<br />
2011. A wannan ranar, ranar hukunci zata fara, ta kuma ci gaba har<br />
21ga Octoba shekata ta 2011.<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki, littafin ruhaniya ne, hanya ɗaya rak kuma da<br />
mutum zai iya gane gaskiyar da ke cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki ita ce idan<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya buɗe idanunsa na ruhaniya. Saboda haka, da yake mun amince<br />
da waɗansu karkatattun ra’ayoyi a matsayin gaskiya, waɗanda ba zamu<br />
iya rabuwa da su ba ta ƙashin kanmu, tilas mu koma ga <strong>Allah</strong>, mu roƙi<br />
jinƙan sa, muna addu’a ya buɗe zuciyar mu ya raba mu da tunani da<br />
ra’ayoyin da suka saɓawa Maganarsa.<br />
Matsalarmu ta rashin iya sallama ra’ayoyin da Littafi Mai-Tsarki<br />
ya nuna mana da cewa ba gaskiya bane yana da girma zamanin nan<br />
dangane da wata gaskiya mai muhimmanci, watau, lokacin bayani a<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki. <strong>Ga</strong>skiyar ita ce, da dama a cikinmu, muna nazarin<br />
matsalar lokaci ta wajen yin misali da bayanan Littafi-Mai-Tsarki.<br />
Littafin nan mai shafi 70, “Mun Kusa Kai <strong>Ga</strong> Ƙarshe”, littafi ne da<br />
aka rubuta bayan an shafe shekara 50 ana binciken Littafi Mai-Tsarki<br />
dangane da tarihin zamani. Bugu da ƙari, an ɗauki dubban awoyi ana<br />
tattaunawa akan abinda ke cikin littafin a shirin “<strong>Family</strong> <strong>Radio</strong>” Dandalin<br />
Tattaunawa. A ƙarshen dukan wannan binciken, gaskiyar ita ce, Kristi ba<br />
zai zo kamar barawo da dare ba, amma, zai zo a rana, da wata, da<br />
shekaran da <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana wa masu bi na gaskiya a cikin Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki.<br />
Yanzu, da ace an bada wannan littafin “Mun Kusa Kai <strong>Ga</strong> Ƙarshe”<br />
ga wani ɗan Ikklisiya mai- aminci wanda ya sami koyaswa a kan cewa<br />
Kristi zai dawo kamar ɓarawo da dare. Ya yarda ya karanta wannan<br />
littafi, ya yi adalci ya bada hukunci na gaskiya. Bayan ya karanta shafi<br />
kaɗan, sai ya tarar bai koyar da cewa Kristi zai zo kamar ɓarawo da dare<br />
ba. Nan da nan zai shiga kariya, zai yi tunani cewa, ‘‘Wannan littafi yana<br />
saɓo. Na san ayoyi da yawa da suke koyar da cewa ba wanda ya san<br />
ranar da Kristi zai dawo. Zai zama kuskure a gareni in karanta wannan<br />
2
littafin saɓo’’ kuma a cikin zuciyarsa, yana ganin hukumcin da ya yanke<br />
a kan littafin nan daidai ne.<br />
Abinda bai fahimta ba kuma ba zai fahimta ba shine kwaɗon da<br />
ya kulle zuciyarsa, shine, tun zamanin Ikkilisiya, abin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya yarda<br />
duk mai bi na gaskiya ya sani shi ne cewa, Kristi zai dawo kamar ɓarawo<br />
da dare. Tuni a cikin Ayukan Manzani sura ɗaya manzani sun yi<br />
tambaya, kamar yadda zamu karanta a aya shidda.<br />
Sufa, da suka taru, suka tambaye shi, suka ce, Ubangiji, a<br />
wannan lokaci ne kake mayar wa Isra’ila da mulki?<br />
Suna son su san lokacin da mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> zai cika. Yesu ya amsa<br />
masu a cikin aya 7 da 8.<br />
Ya ce masu, Ba naku bane da zaku san zamanai da lokatai<br />
waɗanda Uba ya sanya a cikin nasa hukunci. Amma, za ku karɓi<br />
iko lokacinda Ruhu Mai-Tsarki ya zo bisanku, zaku zama shaidu<br />
kuma cikin Urushalima da cikin dukan Yahudiya da Samariya har<br />
kuma iyakar duniya.<br />
Watau, akwai aiki da za a yi, aikin kai bishara ga dukan duniya.<br />
Aikin da aka ba Ikklisiya ke nan a zamanin Ikklisiya, bai kamata kuma su<br />
dami kansu a kan ƙarshen zamani ba.<br />
Saboda haka, <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana a fili cewa abinda za a sani kawai<br />
a zamanin Ikklisiya shine zai dawo kamar barawo da dare. Ba wanda ya<br />
san rana ko sa’a da zai dawo. An shafe shekaru 1,900 a zamanin<br />
Ikklisiya ba tare da an san wani abu game da lokacin dawowarsa ba.<br />
Amma ɗan <strong>Allah</strong> na gaskiya, zai ci gaba da karanta Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki kuma a kowanne lokaci yana son ya san gaskiyar Maganar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Lokacin da ya tarar a cikin Ezekiel 3:17 da Ezekiel 33, da cewa shi mai-<br />
tsaro ne wanda tilas ya faɗakar da duniya game da lokacin dawowar<br />
Kristi. Daga nan kuma bayani lokacin zai fara bayyana, faro daga bayanin<br />
game da halittan duniya a 11,013 BC. A hankali za a fara gane tarihin<br />
duniya, zai fara fahimtar muhimmancin bayanin lokaci a cikin Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki.<br />
Babu shakka wannan hanya ce da <strong>Allah</strong> ya ke taimakawa mutane<br />
da yawa su gwada kansu, su ga ko suna bauta wa <strong>Allah</strong>n Ikklisiyarsu, ko<br />
fastonsu, ko koyarwarsu ko wani abu dabam da <strong>Allah</strong> na Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki. Wannan ya jadada cewa dukan mu mun dogara ne da bisharar<br />
Ruhu Mai-Tsarki domin sanin gaskiya. Zai zama da ban sha’awa idan<br />
muka ƙasƙantar da kanmu muka yi addu’a, muka amince da cewa bisa<br />
ga iyawarmu da hikimarmu, bamu san komai ba. Za mu iya roƙon<br />
Ubangiji ya buɗe idanunmu zuwa ga sanin gaskiya.<br />
Akwai shirin ƙarin gawaji mai-girma da <strong>Allah</strong> ya sa a cikin Littafi<br />
Mai- Tsarki wanda yake faruwa cikin waɗannan shekaru 23 (kwanaki<br />
3
8,400) na kunci mai-tsanani. Wannan yana da nasaba ne da hisabi na<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>ba dayan lokacin ikkilishiya za a iya takaita fahimtar adalcin<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> da kuma hukumcinsa kan masu mugunta a duk zamanin Ikklisiya,<br />
da cewa, a rana ta ƙarshe Kristi zai zo ya zauna akan dakalin shari’a.<br />
Duk miyagu da suka mutu, zasu zo tare da waɗanda suna raye, domin<br />
Kristi ya shiryanta su, ɗaya bayan ɗaya. Za’a same su da laifin aikata<br />
laifufuka da dama, a kuma yanke masu hukuncin zuwa wurin da ake kira<br />
jahanama, inda za’a yi masu azaba har abada.<br />
A gaskiya wannan shine tunani da ke zukatan mutane yawancin<br />
mutane a duniya waɗanda suke da wata dogara ga Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne ko suna cikin Ikklisiya ko kuma sun fice daga Ikkilisya domin<br />
sun gane cewa zamanin Ikklisiya ya ƙare. Abinda yawancin Ikkilisiyai<br />
suka fahimta ke nan a dukan zamanin Ikkilisiya. Saboda haka waɗannan<br />
ƙaunatattun mutanen sun yi imani da cewa zasu iya nazarin ayoyin Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki, da yadda yake da nasaba da hukunci su kai ga sanin gaskiya<br />
ba tare da son zuciya ba. Sai dai, idan ba tare da Ruhu Mai-Tsarki ya<br />
kwance allon zuciyarsu ba, ba za su kai ga sanin gaskiya ba.<br />
Amma a wannan lokaci muna dab da ƙarshen zamani, kuma <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ya ƙara yin muhimman bayanai game da gaskiyar zamanin Ikklisiya da<br />
kuma jaddawalin ƙarshen zamani. Ya kuma bada waɗansu sababbin<br />
bayanai game da tsarin hukunci. Hakika, za mu gane cewa al’adan nan<br />
ta ganin Kristi a matsayin Alkali a ranar ƙarshe, da cewa zai aika da<br />
miyagu zuwa gidan wuta inda fushin <strong>Allah</strong> zai dauwama a kansu har<br />
abada, bai nuna ainihin gaskiyar koyaswar Littafi Mai-Tsarki game da<br />
tsarin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> ba.<br />
Ya kamata kuma a bayyana wata matsala guda ɗaya, yayin da<br />
muke ƙoƙarin ganin gaskiyar Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Nufin <strong>Allah</strong> ne ya bari sai<br />
dab da ƙarshen duniya kafin ya yi bayani mai-yawa game da jaddawalin<br />
da shirin tsarin hukucin <strong>Allah</strong>. Saboda haka <strong>Allah</strong> ya rubuta Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki ta hanyar da zai kasance da ayoyi masu wuyar ganewa.<br />
Ɗaya daga cikin hanyoyin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya yi amfani da su domin ya<br />
zama da wuya a gane gaskiya shine, ya rubuta ayoyin da kalaman da<br />
suke da ma’ana biyu dabam dabam da suka saɓawa juna, ra’ayi da yake<br />
daidai da kuma wanda ba daidai ba. Misali <strong>Allah</strong> ya rubuta a cikin<br />
Timotawus ta daya 3:15 “... Ikklisiyar <strong>Allah</strong> mai rai ke nan, jigon gaskiya<br />
da ƙarfinta”. Bisa ga kalaman wannan shaɗarar, daidai ne a fahimce<br />
wannan aya da cewa Ikklisiya ita ce jigo da kuma tushen gaskiya. Yadda<br />
Ikklisiyar katolika da sababbin Ikklisiyai suke koyar da wannan ayar ke<br />
nan.<br />
Duk da haka, daidai ne a fahimci cewa, wannan ayar tana koyar<br />
da cewa, <strong>Allah</strong> mai-rai shine jigo da tushen gaskiya. <strong>Allah</strong> ya tsara<br />
wannan ayar domin ta zama tarko. Zamu iya sanin kowanne daga cikin<br />
biyun ne daidai ta wajen bin dokokin <strong>Allah</strong> da kuma binciken Littafin<br />
Mai-Tsarki a hankali da gwada aya da aya. Idan Ikklisiya ce jigon da<br />
4
kuma tushen gaskiya na Littafi Mai-Tsarki, kowacce majami’a tana da<br />
damar ruhaniya ta koyarwa, idan ya yiwu kuma, su gyara duk abin da<br />
wata aya a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki take koyarwa, domin Ikklisiya ce jigon<br />
gaskiya. A ɓangare ɗaya kuma, idan <strong>Allah</strong> shine jigo da kuma tushen<br />
gaskiya, hanya guda ɗaya da za mu gane abinda ake koyawa a cikin ayar<br />
da take da wuya shine, ta wajen binciken Littafi Mai-Tsarki a hankali tare<br />
da yin addu’a ga <strong>Allah</strong> domin ya bayyana gaskiyar ta wurin Maganar sa,<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Babu shakka gaskiyar koyarwar wannan ayar ke nan.<br />
Haka kuma, <strong>Allah</strong> ya ɓoye gaskiya da dama a cikin Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki da ke da dangantaka da shirin hukuncin <strong>Allah</strong>. Ayoyi da dama<br />
suna koyaswa a fili kuma daidai, abinda aka saba koyarwa bisa ga al’ada<br />
cewa, a ƙarshen duniya, <strong>Allah</strong> zai tashi dukan waɗanda suka mutu ba<br />
tare da zama zaɓaɓɓu ba, daga mattatu domin su bayyana a gaban<br />
shari’ar Kristi. Za a same su da laifi a kuma yanke masu hukunci maitsanani,<br />
su kuma sha azaba can gaba a wani wurin da ake kira<br />
jahannama.<br />
Za a kuma iya fahimtar waɗannan ayoyin da kyau a kan cewa<br />
suna koyarwar da ta amince da koyaswar cewa za a shafe duniya baki<br />
ɗaya tare da dukan waɗanda ba zaɓaɓɓu ba da basu da ceto a ranar 21<br />
ga watan Octoba shekara ta 2011.<br />
Misali, Litttafi Mai-Tsarki, ya yi Magana kan “Madauwamiyar hallaka” ko<br />
‘‘ƙorama ta wuta marar mutuwa’’. Za a iya fahimtar waɗannan kalmomin<br />
da cewa irin wannan hukumcin ko kuma wutar tana da tsanani da zata<br />
shafe wanda aka yankewa irin wannan hukumcin, yadda ba zai sake<br />
rayuwa ba.<br />
Ta yaya zamu gane ko menene daidai? Zamu san abinda ke<br />
daidai yayin da muka bincike Littafi Mai-Tsarki muka tarar cewa ba a yi<br />
amfani da wannan kalmar ‘‘rai’’, ko ‘‘rayuwa’’ dangane da waɗanda suka<br />
mutu ba tare da sun tuba ba, da kuma waɗanda aka ta da su daga<br />
matattu (ka dubi: Tashin waɗanda basu da ceto daga matattu a shafi ...).<br />
Tilas mu tuna cewa sai mutum yana da rai kafin ya daure azaba.<br />
Bugu da ƙari, <strong>Allah</strong> a cikin yalwar alherinsa ya bamu misalin<br />
wutar har abada. Lokacin da aka hallaka Sodom wutar ta ci gaba da ci na<br />
’yan kwanaki ƙalilan kawai. Duk da haka, an yi magana a kan wutar da ta<br />
hallaka Saduma da <strong>Ga</strong>muratu a matsayin ‘‘wuta ta har abada’’. Mun<br />
karanta a cikin wasiƙa ta yahuda sura 7 cewa:<br />
Kamar yadda Saduma da <strong>Ga</strong>murata, da birane na wajensu, da shi<br />
ke tare da su suke, bada kansu ga fasikanci, suka biɗi kwaɗai ba<br />
irin na tabi’a ba, an nuna su, kamar misalin wuta ta har abada,<br />
cikin hukunci da suke har abada.<br />
Saboda haka, zamu iya tabbatar da cewa bisa ga waɗannan<br />
dalilai da waɗansu dalilai na Littafin Mai-Tsarki, zamu iya gane cewa<br />
fahimta irin wadda aka saba bisa al’ada bata da madogara. Idan wanda<br />
5
ashi da ceto ya mutu, ya mutu har abada, cikin jiki da kuma ruhu. Za a<br />
faɗaɗa wannan gaskiyar idan muka shiga sura ta gaba.<br />
6
Sura Ta Biyu<br />
Rashin Sahihancin Fahimtar Shirin Shari’a Irin Ta Al’ada.<br />
A cikin ’yan shekarun da suka wuce, mun koyi cewa kafin ranar<br />
sharia akwai kwanaki 8,400 (shekara 23) na lokacin da ake kira babban<br />
tsanani. A wannan lokaci, <strong>Allah</strong> yana gwada dukan mutanen, da ke cikin<br />
Ikkilisiya, ko su masu bi na gaskiya ne ko kuma babu. Wato, ko sun<br />
ƙwallafa tunaninsu a kan koyarwar Ikklisiyarsu, ko kuma suna a shirye<br />
su ji su kuma yi biyayya da dukan abin da Littafi Mai-Tsarki ke koyarwa.<br />
Ko da shike yanzu ne aka bayyana waɗansu koyaswa da dama.<br />
A lokacin babban tsanani, wanda muke ciki yanzu, mun gane<br />
cewa <strong>Allah</strong> yana amfani da gwaje gwaje da yawa da suke bambanta<br />
alkama da zawan. An umurta irin wannan gwadawar a cikin Ruya ta<br />
Yohanna 3:10 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Tun da ka kiyaye maganar haƙurina, ni ma zan kiyaye ka daga<br />
sa’ar jaraba, wannan da ke zuwa bisa ga dukan duniya, domin a<br />
jarabci mazannan duniya.<br />
A wannan aya, wannan kalmar “sa’ar Jaraba” ko jaraba ko<br />
gwadawa, tana da alaƙa da babban tsanani na kwanaki 8,400. A wannan<br />
lokacin za a yi gwaje gwaje ko jarabawa da dama, waɗansu misalai da<br />
muka koya suna nan kamar haka:<br />
1. Zamanin Ikkilisiya ya zo ga ƙarshe.<br />
2. Haƙiƙannin ranar sharia.<br />
3. Ainihin fahimtar shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
4. Ainihin fahimtar dukan abinda samun ceto ya ƙunsa.<br />
5. Fahimtar cewa <strong>Allah</strong> ya ɓoye gaskiya mai muhimmanci a<br />
cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki da ba za a bayyana ba sai an kusa<br />
da ƙarshe.<br />
6. Zamu aika wa duniya sakon cewa har yanzu akwai damar<br />
samun ceto, kuma yana yiwuwa a ci gaba da samun ceto<br />
har zuwa rana ta ƙarshe ta babban tsanani ranar 21 ga<br />
watan Mayu, 2011.<br />
7. Dole mu faɗakar da duniya da cewa idan ranar shari’a ta<br />
zo, ba bu sauran damar samun ceto, ko kuma wani jinƙan<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki yana nan yau kamar yadda yake lokacin da aka<br />
kammala rubuta shi shakaru 1,900 da suka wuce. Duk da haka sai a<br />
lokacinmu, babu wani, komi zurfin ilimisa ko amincinsu, ko irin bautar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> a matsayin Mai-Cetonsu da suke yi cikin tawali’u. Babu wanda ya<br />
iya sanin ainihin shekarar da aka yi halitta daga Littafi Mai Tsarki, da<br />
7
shekarar da aka yi ruwan Ɗufana ko ranar da aka haifi Yesu. Haka nan<br />
kuma, babu wanda ya iya sanin ainihin cikakken shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Saboda haka, kamar yadda muka ambata a baya, a duk faɗin<br />
zamanin Ikkilisiya abin da aka fi yarda da shi a tsakanin masana tauhida<br />
da ɗaliban Littafi Mai-Tsarki shine cewa mutum ba zai iya sanin ainihin<br />
lokacin da Kristi zai dawo a ƙarshen duniya ba An yarda da cewa bayanin<br />
da ke cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki cewa Kristi zai zo kamar ɓarawo da dare<br />
(ITassalunikawa 5:2, IIBitrus 3:10) ya amsa tambayar nan game da<br />
lokacin da Kristi zai dawo.<br />
Haka nan game da yanayin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> bisa marasa ceto, an<br />
fahimci cewa a ƙarshen zamani, Kristi zai shari’anta dukan marasa ceto<br />
na duniya a fili. Za a tashi waɗanda suka mutu su kuma san abinda ke<br />
faruwa domin a yi masu shari’a. Daga nan kuma waɗanda suke da rai a<br />
ƙarshen zamani, da kuma waɗanda aka tashe su daga mattatu, za’a<br />
same su da laifi a kuma hukuntasu zuwa hukunci a wani wuri da ake kira<br />
jahannama. Ayoyi kamar su II Korintiyawa 5:10, da Romawa 14:10-11 da<br />
sauransu, suna koyar da haka a fili.<br />
Amma <strong>Allah</strong> yayi alkawari a cikin Mai-Wa’azi 8:5-6 inda muka<br />
karanta cewa:<br />
Dukan wanda yake riƙe da dokan ba za ya kusanci wuta ba;<br />
zuciyar mai-hikima kuwa ta kan gane kwanaki da shari’a kuma<br />
gama ga kowane al’amari akwai lokaci da shari’a. Saboda haka<br />
zuciyar mutum da nauyi ta ke a gare shi.<br />
A cikin Daniel 12:9 kuma <strong>Allah</strong> ya ce:<br />
Yace, yi tafiyarka ya Daniel, gama an kuble zantuttukan, an<br />
hatimce su har kwanakin ƙarshe.<br />
Tun da lokaci da shari’a suna da alaƙa da ƙarshen zamani, za mu<br />
iya sa zuciya cewa da shike muna kusa da ƙarshen, a wannan lokaci za<br />
mu ƙara sanin abubuwa da yawa game da lokacin tarihi da kuma<br />
cikakken shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Babu shakka mun rigaya mun koya daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki baki ɗaya,<br />
ainihin rana, da wata da shekarar da za a yi fyaucewa, watau lokacin da<br />
za a fyauce dukan masu bada gaskiya zuwa cikin sama. Mun kuma koya<br />
game da ainihin lokacin za a hallaka duniya da ƙasa da dukan ayyukan ta<br />
baki ɗaya da wuta*<br />
Haka kuma, a wannan lokacin <strong>Allah</strong> ya bamu fahimi domin mu<br />
iya sanin ƙarin shirin hukumcin <strong>Allah</strong>. <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana filla filla lokacin<br />
da al’amuran ƙarshen duniya zasu faru, wannan kuma ya taimake mu<br />
domin mu fahimci tsarin sa na shari’a.<br />
8
Za mu gane cewa shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> ya fara ne kafin zunubi ya<br />
shigo duniya, kuma za a gama a lokacin aka ƙona duniya da dukan<br />
ayyukanta. (II Bitrus 3:10).<br />
Yayin da muke nazarin shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>, zamu yi nazarin<br />
waɗansu muhimman kalmomi kamar, “mutuwa’’ da ‘‘hallaka”, da kuma<br />
abubuwa kamar kunya, asarar gado, babban tsananin ciwo, daga ƙarshe<br />
kuma da shafewa daga doron ƙasa. Amma, kafin mu yi wannan, bari mu<br />
dubi waɗansu koyaswar ƙarya da waɗansu wahalhalun da ke cikin<br />
fahimta irin ta al’ada game da shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Kusan kowacce Ikklisiya a dukan zamanin Ikkilisiya ta gaskanta<br />
da cewa aikinsu na farko shine koyawa mutanen yadda zasu sami ceto.<br />
Saboda haka kowacce majami’a ta tsara shiri wanda ba ya bisa koyaswar<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki, da suka gaskanta cewa yana daidai da koyarwar Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki inda suke koyaswa da cewa waɗanda suke bin shirin su suna<br />
da tabbacin ceto.<br />
Babban abu mai muhimmanci na wannan shirinsu, shine<br />
tsatsauran tuni cewa abinda zai maye gurbin ceto shine hallaka ta har<br />
abada. Abinda suka fahimta game da hallaka ta har abada, shine marasa<br />
ceto za su sha azaba a ƙalƙashin fushin <strong>Allah</strong>, na har abada abadin a<br />
wani wurin da ake kira jahannama. Sun hakikanta cewa irin wannan<br />
hukumcin mai tsanani kan zunubi, zai taimaki mutane su gane da irin<br />
bukatar ceto da suke da ita.<br />
An gaya wa mutane cewa zasu iya samun wannan ceto kuma su<br />
sami tabbacin cewa ba za su taɓa shan azaba a jahannama ba, idan suka<br />
bi koyarwar majamia ko ta mai-wa’azi da aminci. Ya yiwu ya ƙunshi<br />
abubuwa kamar baftisma da ruwa, addu’ar mai-zunubi, shaidar<br />
bangaskiya, zama memban Ikkilisiya, bada zakka, cin jibi karɓan<br />
Almasihu, da dai sauransu. Da zarar sun sami tabbaci daga wurin fasto,<br />
ko firis ko dattijo, ko dikon, cewa suna da ceto, kuma sun sami babbar<br />
ta’aziyar cewa ba zasu taɓa shiga jahannama su zauna har abada ba.<br />
Ba a daɗe ba sai wata matsala ta taso. Misali idan yaro ya mutu<br />
ba tare da ya sami ceto ba. Da shike zunubi ɗaya zai iya sa mutun ya<br />
zama mai laifi kamar ya ƙetare dukan dokoki (Yakub 2:10), to bisa ga<br />
wannan koyaswar ƙaramin yaron da ya mutu ba tare da ya sami ceto ba,<br />
zai sha wahala a jahannama har abada. Wannan yana nufin cewa za a<br />
yiwa ƙaramin yaron hukumci sabili da zunuban da ya aikata na<br />
yarantaka.<br />
Shin gaskiya ne cewa <strong>Allah</strong> mai-jinƙai <strong>Allah</strong> mai-adalci zai sa<br />
ƙaramin yaro haka ya sha baƙar wahala ta har abada domin shi ko ita<br />
sun mutu ba tare da sun sami ceto ba? Babbar tambayar da masu ilimin<br />
tauhidi a cikin majami’u suke fuskanta ke nan, kuma an yi ƙoƙarin<br />
neman amsoshi da dama na waɗannan tambayoyi kuma ya zama<br />
muhimmiyar koyaswar kowacce Ikkilisiya.<br />
Misali Ɗarikar Roman Katolika suna da ra’ayin cewa idan an yi wa<br />
jariri baftisma zai wanke dukan laifofinsa da suka sami tushe daga<br />
9
zunubin Adamu. Wannan kuma zai sa yaron ya kasance ƙarƙashin<br />
kulawa da kariyar Ikkilisiya, inda, idan ya bi dokokin Ikklisiyar a hankali<br />
zai bada tabbacin cewa fushin <strong>Allah</strong> ba zai taɓa saukowa a bisa kan<br />
wannan mutumin ba.<br />
Ikkilisiyun da suka tashi a baya, suma sun biyo sahun irin<br />
wannan shirin ko da shike sun fi kusa da gaskiya fiye da ɗarikar katolika.<br />
Suma sun gaskanta suna kuma koyar da cewa jaririn da aka yi masa<br />
baftisma a majami’a ya kan shiga cikin wata yarjejeniyar dangantaka ta<br />
ruhaniya da <strong>Allah</strong>, ta yadda idan aka bi dokokin Ikklisiyar da aminci zai<br />
sami tabbacin ceto.<br />
Ikkilisiyan da suka bi koyaswa irin ta Arminiyawa na yanci, kamar<br />
majami’ar baftis sun ƙirƙiro wata hanya ta daban. Sun tsaida shawara<br />
cewa Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya koyar da cewa akwai lokacin da mutum zai<br />
bada lissafin aikin da ya yi. Watau sai yaro ya kai waɗansu shekaru, kafin<br />
a hukumta shi sabili da abinda ya aikata. Saboda haka idan yaro ya mutu<br />
kafin ya kai waɗannan shekarun, <strong>Allah</strong> ba zai hukumta shi ba.<br />
Dukan waɗannan koyaswar basu da makama a cikin Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki ko da shike har wa yau ana koyas da su da hakikanin gaskiya a<br />
cikin dukan Ikkilisiyai da ke faɗin duniya.<br />
Ina Jinƙan <strong>Allah</strong>?<br />
Wata matsala ta taso dangane da itifaƙin cewa hukuncin zunubi<br />
shine a sha azaba a wani wurin da ake kira jahannama har abada.<br />
Mutane da yawa waɗanda suka yiwa Littafi Mai-Tsarki ba’a sun yi wata<br />
tambaya mai ma’ana cewa “Kun ce <strong>Allah</strong> na Littafi Mai-Tsarki, mai-jinƙai<br />
ne da adalci saboda haka kun yi imani da cewa <strong>Allah</strong> mai- jinƙai da<br />
adalci zai azabtar da mutumin da ke rayuwa mai kyau cikin mutumci ta<br />
wurin jefa shi a wurin da ake kira jahannama wurin da shi ko ita zasu<br />
sha matsananciyar wahala ta har abada? Wanne irin <strong>Allah</strong> ne, <strong>Allah</strong>n ku<br />
na Littafi Mai-Tsarki? Kuma ta yaya wannan ra’ayin yayi daidai da<br />
maganar da aka yi a cikin Littafi Mai Tsarki cewa <strong>Allah</strong> baya jin daɗin<br />
mutuwar mugu?” (Ezekiel 18:23 da 32).<br />
Ikkilisiyai da dama sun yi nazari a kan irin waɗannan tambayoyi,<br />
domin haka suka ƙirƙiro da wata hanya da zata ƙarfafa mutane su<br />
amince shirin ceton su na yi-da-kanka. Maimakon jaddada abu marar<br />
kyau wato wahala ta har abada, sun canja yadda suke gabatar da batun<br />
ceto zuwa bada ƙarfi kan abinda yake da kyau, suna cewa “<strong>Allah</strong> yana<br />
ƙaunar ka kuma yana da kyakkyawan shiri domin rayuwar ka. Zaka iya<br />
zama cikin wannan shirin ta wurin karɓar Yesu”. Watau ‘‘ka haɗa kai da<br />
mu daga nan baka bukatar ka damu, kuma ba zaka ƙara damuwa da<br />
fargaban da yake zuwa cikin tunanin ka da zuciyarka loto loto ba domin<br />
ka sani cewa akwai <strong>Allah</strong> kuma wata rana dole zaka bada lissafi a<br />
gabansa”. Waɗannan majami’un basu rabu da ra’ayin hukumci har<br />
abada ba, amma a wurinsu wani abu ne da za a yi watsi da shi ba<br />
abinda za a tada hankali akai bane.<br />
10
Ya yiwu mu kuma ƙara lura cewa Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya koyar cewa:<br />
‘‘Haƙƙin zunubi mutuwa ne...’’ (Romawa 6:23a). Koyarwa da aka saba da<br />
ita ta al’ada tace “Hakkin zunubi.” yana nufin a rana ta ƙarshe dukan<br />
wanda baya cikin zaɓɓaɓu na <strong>Allah</strong>, (waɗanda basu da ceto) za’a rayar<br />
da su domin su tsaya a gaban Kristi alƙalinsu. A can za’a same su da<br />
laifi saboda haka za a yanke masu hukumcin shan azaba a wani wuri da<br />
ake kira jahannama.’’ Waɗanda suke da ra’ayi irin na al’ada ba zasu<br />
yarda da wannan ba amma suna riƙe da fahimtarsu na hukunci kuma<br />
yana nufin kuma da shike an yi cikinmu aka kuma haife mu cikin zunubi<br />
(Zabura 51:5), Dukan jinjiri da aka zubar da cikinsa da dukan jaririn da<br />
ya mutu wanda ba ya cikin zaɓaɓɓu, za a yanke masu wannan<br />
matsanancin hukuncin.<br />
Wannan mumunan ra’yin game da hukuncin <strong>Allah</strong> , wani<br />
mummunar ra’ayin musun dokar <strong>Allah</strong> ne, an tsara wannan ra’ayin ba<br />
tare da wani cikakken sani ba ko kuma cikin rashin sanin cewa, dukan<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki dokar <strong>Allah</strong> ba ne. Saboda haka ana ganin maganar<br />
kamar “Haƙƙin zunubi mutuwa ce” da “cikin ranar da kaci mutuwa zaka<br />
yi lallai” kamar umurni ne daga bakin <strong>Allah</strong> maimakon ɗaukarta a<br />
matsayin dokar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Yana da matuƙar muhimmanci mu gane cewa Maganar <strong>Allah</strong><br />
gaba ɗayanta tana da dangantaka da Kristi kansa. <strong>Allah</strong> ya ce Kalman<br />
ya zama jiki, ya zamna a wurinmu (Yohanna 1:14a ). Maganar <strong>Allah</strong> tana<br />
da cikakken iko kamar Kristi kansa. Ibraniyawa 4:12-13 ta ce:<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>ma maganar <strong>Allah</strong> mai rai ce, mai aikatawa, ta fi kowanne<br />
takobi mai kaifi biyu ci, tana kwa hudawa har zuwa rarraban rai<br />
da ruhu da gaɓaɓuwa da ɓargo kuma, tana kwa da hanzari ga<br />
ganewar tunanin zuciya da nufe-nufenta. Babu wani abu mai rai<br />
kuma da ba’a bayyana a gabansa ba. Amma abubuwa duka a<br />
tsiraice suke, buɗaɗɗu kuma, gaban idanun wannan wanda muke<br />
gareshi.<br />
Lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya gaya wa Adamu cewa ran da ya ci daga itacen<br />
mutuwa zai yi, <strong>Allah</strong> yana furta dokarsa ne ga Adamu. Wannan doka<br />
tana da ikon Kristi kansa bisa kan Adamu, saboda haka lokacin da<br />
Adamu yayi ƙetare dokar nan take aka hukunta Adamu bisa ga wannan<br />
dokar zuwa hukuncin mutuwa.<br />
Lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya hallaka Sodoma da Gomorah da duniyar<br />
zamanin, Nuhu, waɗannan mutanen ba su bukaci tsayawa a gaban Kristi<br />
a matsayin alkali ba kafin a zartar da hukuncin mutuwa ba. Sun ƙetare<br />
dokar <strong>Allah</strong> kuma duk lokacin da suka aikata zunubi dokar <strong>Allah</strong> zata<br />
kashe su zuwa mutuwa.<br />
A hakikanin gaskiya duk lokacin da wani wanda baya da ceto ya<br />
mutu, ko da ta wacce hanya ya mutu, lokacin ne a ke hukunta shi a<br />
matsayin biyan bashin zunuban sa. Domin koyaswar da aka saba da ita<br />
11
dangane da shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> bai yi la’akari da cewa dukan Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki dokar <strong>Allah</strong> ba ne, kuma kowacce kalma tana da iko kamar Kristi<br />
kansa, shirin shari’a ne wanda mutum ya saƙa a zuciyarsa. Da shike<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ne ya ɓoye gaskiya mai yawa game da lokacin da kuma hukunci<br />
domin kada a bayyana su ga ’yan adam sai kusan ƙarshen zamani, An<br />
rubuta Littafi Mai-Tsarki a cikin harshe mai sarƙaƙiya. Nufin <strong>Allah</strong> cewa<br />
kada kowa ya fahimci dukan abin da Littafi Mai-Tsarki yake koyarwa<br />
game da lokaci da sharia sai a lokacin mu. Shirin <strong>Allah</strong> ne ba za a<br />
fahimci wannan gaskiya mai muhimmanci ba sai lokacin da duniya ta zo<br />
kusa da ƙarshe. Ta haka <strong>Allah</strong> ya bari aka ci gaba da yiwa tsarin shari’ar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> karkatacciyar fahimta ta alada da ake koyarwa a majami’u, yayinda<br />
kuma ya bari Ikklisiyai suna koyar da shirin ceto irin na yi-da-kanka.<br />
Saboda haka, har yau akwai ɗaliban Littafi Mai-Tsarki da basu da<br />
wani mugun nufi, da suke ƙoƙarin bada hujjar fahimtar shirin <strong>Allah</strong> na<br />
shari’a bisa ga al’ada ta wurin nazarin kalma a kan kalma, da ake samu a<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Sai dai suna tace waɗannan kalmomi bisa ga tunanin<br />
da suka saba da shi da gurguwar fahimtar shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> da suka<br />
hakikanta cewa daidai ne. Wani aiki ne mawuyacin gaske domin shirin<br />
shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> irin na al’ada bai yarda da cikakken ikon kowace kalma a<br />
cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki a matsayin dokar <strong>Allah</strong> ba.<br />
A takaice, zamu iya cewa, a duk zamanin Ikklisiya akwai waɗansu<br />
matsalolin da ba’a warware ba dangane da gaskiyar fahimtar hukunci<br />
kan zunubi. Za a iya gane wannan idan muka tuna cewa an rufe bayanai<br />
masu yawa game da cikaken bayani da kuma abinda ya shafi ƙarshen<br />
zamani a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki domin kada a fahimta. <strong>Allah</strong> ya sa<br />
harshen Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya kasance da wuyar ganewa domin waɗannan<br />
gaskiyar zata kasance a ɓoye sai kusan ƙarshen zamani.<br />
Amma, yayin da muka doshi ƙarshen zamani, nufin <strong>Allah</strong> ne cewa<br />
za a san bayanai masu yawa. Abin baƙin ciki shine Ikklisiyai suna<br />
tsayayya yanzu da gaskiyar da ake bayyanawa, waɗanda suke dogara<br />
gaba ɗaya kan shaidarsu , koyarwarsu da tauhidin da suka yi ittifaki a<br />
kai. Haka wannan yake musamman domin zamu iya ganewa cewa<br />
tunanin shan wuya har abada a jahannama a sakamakon zunubinsu ba<br />
gaskiya ba ne. Saboda haka an kawar da wata babbar hanyar da ake<br />
amfani da ita wajen ƙarfafa mutane su sami ceto.<br />
Bugu da ƙari, majami’u sun gamsu da fahimtarsu yanzu ta Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki. Basu gane ba ko kuma basu fatar gane shirin <strong>Allah</strong> cewa, a<br />
cikin kwanakin nan na ƙarshe, za a sami ƙarin sanin gaskiya daga cikin<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Misali mun koya daga farkon wannan bincike cewa,<br />
duk tsawon zamanin Ikklisiya, majami’u sun yi ittifaki, bisa bincikensu<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki da suka yi a hankali, cewa Kristi zai zo kamar ɓarawo<br />
da dare. Amma yanzu da shike muna dab da ƙarshen zamani, <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
ba ma masu bi na gaskiya cikakken bayani wanda ya fito daga Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki kaɗai domin mu sani da cikakken tabbaci rana da wata da<br />
shekarar da duniya zata ƙare.<br />
12
Haka kuma, yanzu muna koya daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki bayanai<br />
masu ɗinbin yawa game da shari’a. Ka tuna abinda muka koya daga Mai-<br />
Wa’azi 8:5-6 inda <strong>Allah</strong> yace:<br />
Dukan wanda ya ke riƙe da dokar ba za ya kusanci wuta ba,<br />
zuciyar mai-hikima kwa ta kan gane kwanaki da shari’a kuma:<br />
gama ga kowane al’amari akwai nasa lokaci da shari’a, domin<br />
ɓacin zuciyar mutum da nauyi ya ke a gareshi.<br />
Kada mu yi mamaki da cewa Ikkilisiyai suna gaba da ittifaki game<br />
da lokaci, wanda muka koya daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki, kuma zasu ci gaba<br />
da ƙin yarda da yanayin shari’a, wanda kuma ya kasance sakamakon<br />
binciken Littafi Mai-Tsarki a hankali. Amma ya kamata muyi farin ciki<br />
domin da yake muna kusa da ƙarshen zamani <strong>Allah</strong> yana ƙara nuna wa<br />
masu bi na gaskiya gaskiyar Littafi Mai-Tsarki da take ɓoye a cikin Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki tun shakaru 1,900 da suka wuce.<br />
Ƙaunar Mutum <strong>Ga</strong> Mutum<br />
Kafin mu bar binciken mu na yanzu, na fahimtar shirin shari’ar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> bisa ga al’ada, bari mu dubi wani abu wanda ya maida hankali a<br />
kan wannan batu. Yana da dangantaka da umurnin <strong>Allah</strong> cewa mu<br />
ƙaunace maƙwabtanmu.<br />
Yesu ya yi tambaya a cikin Matta 22:36 cewa:<br />
Malam, wacce ce babbar doka a cikin Attaaurat?<br />
Mun karanta amsar Yesu cikin Aya 37 zuwa 40:<br />
Yace masa, ka yi ƙaunar Ubangiji <strong>Allah</strong>nka da dukan zuciyarka da<br />
dukan ranka da dukan azancinka wannan ce babbar doka, itace<br />
kwa ta fari. Wata kuma ta biyu mai kamaninta ke nan, kayi<br />
ƙaunar maƙwabcinka kamar ranka. <strong>Ga</strong> waɗannan doka biyu<br />
dukan Attaurat da Annabawa suke ratayawa.<br />
Bisa ga Yohanna 14:21 mun sani cewa mu ƙaunace <strong>Allah</strong> shine<br />
mu kiyaye dokokinsa, kamar yadda muka karanta:<br />
Wanda yake da dokoki na yana kwa kiyaye su shine yake ƙaunata:<br />
wanda yana ƙaunata kuma za ya zama ƙaunatacen ubana, ni ma<br />
zan ƙaunace shi in bayyana kaina gare shi kuma.<br />
Mun kuma sani cewa dokokinsa sune dukan Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
Mutumin da yake da ceto, mai-bi na gaskiya yana da marmarin yin<br />
biyyaya da dukan Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
13
Sai dai a wannan tsarin da <strong>Allah</strong> yace ka ƙaunaci <strong>Allah</strong> da dukan<br />
zuciyarka da dukan ranka da dukan azancinka, ya bada umurni cewa ka<br />
ƙaunaci maƙwabcinka kamar kanka. Ta haka <strong>Allah</strong> yake fito da wani<br />
ɓangare guda na ƙaunar mu zuwa gareshi ta wurin jadada bukatar mu<br />
ƙaunaci maƙwabcin mu. Ba kawai yana neman ya jawo hankalinmu kan<br />
ƙaunar makwabcinmu ba, amma yana kafa mana ma’aunin da za mu<br />
auna ƙaunar mu ga maƙwabcinmu. Wato ya kamata ƙaunar mu zuwa ga<br />
maƙwabcinmu ta zama daidai da yadda muke ƙaunar kanmu.<br />
Mu koya daga misalin Basamariye mai kirki (Luka 10:29-37) da<br />
cewa maƙwabchinmu shine duk wanda yake da bukatar taimako.<br />
Wannan ya tabbatar mana da cewa duk wanda ba shi da ceto yana<br />
bukatar taimako na ruhaniya saboda haka maƙwabcinmu ne. Saboda a<br />
hakikanin gaskiya maƙwabcinmu shine kowa a duniya. Shi ya sa mu ka<br />
aika da bishara mai daraja cikin duniya. Duk wanda ba shi da ceto yana<br />
bukatar taimakonmu, Kuma babu shakka <strong>Allah</strong> yayi amfani da Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki ya ceci waɗanda aka zaɓa domin a cece su.<br />
Da shike ya kamata mu ƙaunaci maƙwabtanmu kamar kanmu. Ya<br />
kamata mu bukaci abu mafi kyau dominsu cikin gaskiya. Abu mafi kyau<br />
shine ceto. Amma, mene ne zai faru idan mutum ya mutu ba tare da ya<br />
sami ceto ba? Har yanzu zamu ƙaunace shi? Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya bada<br />
amsar wannan tambayar a cikin Matta 5:44 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Amma ina ce maku, kuyi ƙaunar magabtanku, kuma waɗanda su<br />
kan tsananta maku, ku yi masu addu’a.<br />
Zai zama da wuya a dama daga magabatan da zasu sami ceto.<br />
Amma duk da haka zamu ƙaunace su. Dauda da kuma Yesu sun sun bar<br />
mana gurbin nuna ƙauna ga waɗanda basu da ceto har ma bayan sun<br />
mutu. A ƙalla cikin kusan shekaru 15 na rayuwar sarki Saul, ya yi ƙoƙari<br />
ya kashe Dauda ko ta wacce hanya. Duk da haka, bayan da sarki Saul ya<br />
mutu, Dauda ya nuna baƙin cikinsa da ƙauna a ayoyi kamar IISamaila<br />
1:9 da 24 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Ya Isra’ila an kashe darajarka a bisa maɗaukakan wuraren ka;<br />
masu iko ƙaƙa za a kwatata faɗuwarsu...Ku ’yan matan Isra’ila,<br />
ku yi kuka bisa Saul, shi wanda ya yafa maku mulufi mai<br />
ƙayatarwa. Ya yi maku adon lu’u-lu’u da zinariya.<br />
Kuma a cikin IISamaila 2:5 muka karanta cewa:<br />
Dauda kuma ya aike manzanni zuwa wurin mazammnan Jabesh –<br />
Gilead, ya ce masu, ma su albarka ne ku na Ubangiji da shike kun<br />
nuna wannan alheri ga Ubangijinku wato Saul, kin bizne shi.<br />
14
Dauda ya nuna ƙauna da girmamawa ga mattacen magabcinsa,<br />
sarki Saul, amma ya nuna ƙauna mafi girma ga mugun ɗansa Absalom.<br />
Lokacin da Absalom yana da shekara 25, ya fara shirin kashe mahaifinsa<br />
Dauda. Sha’warsa ita ce ya ƙwace kujerar sarautar Isra’ila daga ubansa. A<br />
gaskiya ma, tawayensa ya kawo rashin zaman lafiya a fili har ya tilasta<br />
Dauda ya gudu daga Urushalima domin kada Absalom ya kashe shi.<br />
Amma an bayyana zurfin ƙaunar Dauda zuwa ga mugun ɗansa<br />
mai cin amana wanda daga ƙarshe shugaban mayaƙan Dauda ya kashe<br />
shi a cikin IISamaila 18:33 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Sai sarki yayi juyayi da yawa ya hau wajen benen da ke kan ƙofa, ya<br />
yi ta kuka; yana tafiya yana cewa ya ɗana Absalom, ya ɗana, ɗana<br />
Abasalom, da ma <strong>Allah</strong> ya yarda na mutu dominka, ya Absalom, ya<br />
ɗana ɗana.<br />
Ƙaunar Dauda domin Absalom ta nuna irin ƙaunar da zamu yi wa<br />
makwabcinmu. Bai kamata mu yi farin ciki ba a kan mutuwar<br />
magabcinmu, amma muyi baƙin ciki cewa sun fuskanci fushin <strong>Allah</strong> da<br />
yake saukowa kan dukan waɗanda basu da ceto.<br />
Har’ ila yau, mun ga irin ƙaunar da Kristi ya nuna ga waɗanda<br />
zasu fuskanci fushin <strong>Allah</strong>. Mun karanta a Luka 19:41-44 cewa:<br />
Sa’anda yayi kusa, ya hangi birni, yayi kuka a kanta, yace. Da ma<br />
kin sani a cikin wannan rana, har ke ma, abin da ya tabbata ga<br />
salama. Amma yanzu a ɓoye yake a idanunki. <strong>Ga</strong>ma kwanakin<br />
zasu abko maki inda maƙiyanki zasu gina maki ganuwa, su sa ki<br />
a tsaka, su tsare ki daga kowane sassa. Su fyaɗe ki a ƙasa da<br />
’ya’yanki a cikinki, ba za su bar ko dutse ɗaya bisa wani a cikinki<br />
ba, da shike ba ki lura da kwanakin ziyartonki ba.<br />
A waɗannnan ayoyi mun karanta cewa Yesu yayi kuka domin<br />
Urushalima, wadda a nan take wakiltar dukan waɗanda basu da ceto a<br />
cikin ƙasar Isra’ila, da kuma dukan waɗanda suka rage a majami’u<br />
waɗanda zasu fuskanci cikakken fushin <strong>Allah</strong> domin zunubansu. An<br />
albarce su ta musamman domin sun koya daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Sun<br />
koya da yawa game da ƙaunar <strong>Allah</strong> da jinƙansa. Amma sun juya<br />
gaskiyar Littafi Mai-Tsarki zuwa koyaswar da ta gamshe su. Sun ci gaba<br />
da tafiya cikin girman kansu. Za mu iya ganinsu a cikin ruhaniya kamar<br />
marasa son zaman lafiya waɗanda suka cancanci fushin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Amma Yesu yayi kuka dominsu. Ka yi tunani kan cewa <strong>Allah</strong> da<br />
kansa yana kuka domin dole ya hukunta waɗanda suka tayas masa. Ba<br />
abin mamaki ba ne da muka karanta a cikin Ezekiel 33:11 cewa:<br />
Sai ka ce masu, in ji Ubangiji Yahweh na rantse da raina, ba ni da<br />
wani jin daɗin cikin mutuwar mugu...’’<br />
15
Muna koyan cewa tilas ne <strong>Allah</strong> ya sauko da hukunci kan<br />
ƙaunatattunmu da abokanmu da basu da ceto, wannan kuma yana cika<br />
mu da baƙin ciki da ɓacin rai. Amma wannan ɓacin ran zai ragu ainun<br />
domin mun san abokinmu ba zai sake wahala ba muddin ya mutu. Sai<br />
dai idan fahimtar nan ta al’ada daidai ne, cewa marasa ceto zasu sha<br />
azaba ta har abada a wurin da ake kira jahannama, babu shakka zamu yi<br />
baƙin ciki ainun yayin da abokan mu marasa ceto suka mutu. Idan<br />
abokinmu ya yi mummunar rayuwa a nan duniya, yana jin daɗi da<br />
walwawa irin ta duniya, amma ya watsar da Littafi Mai-Tsarki, zamu ci<br />
gaba da baƙin ciki bayan mutuwarsa idan muka yi tunani wahalar nan<br />
marar matuƙa.<br />
Amma yanzu, Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya yi mana gyara a fahimtar mu<br />
ta shari’a. Ko da shike abokinmu ya mutu yana watsar Littafi Mai Tsarki,<br />
ko da shike babu daɗi cewa an hana shi wannan kyakkyawan gado na<br />
madauwammi, da kuma farin ciki da ɗaukaka na zama magada tare da<br />
Kristi a sabuwar sama da sabuwar duniya, kuma ko da shike yana da<br />
muni sanin cewa mutuwarsa hukumci ne abin kunya ƙarkashin la’anar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>, akwai labari mai daɗi. A ƙalla, zamu iya samun tabbacin cewa<br />
mutuwar abokinmu, tana nufin ba zai ƙara zama ƙalƙashin tsanani da<br />
wahala ba. Rayuwarsa ta ƙare<br />
Abin baƙin ciki ne ganin cewa, mutane da yawa waɗanda suka<br />
gaskanta cewa suna da ceto suna fushi mai tsanani da koyaswar da ke<br />
cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki kamar yadda aka bayyana a cikin wannan littafin.<br />
Fushinsu yana bamu mamaki. Mun sani akwai mutane masu ɗunbin yawa<br />
da suka hakikanta cewa suna da ceto amma a hakikannin gaskiya basu<br />
da ceto. Sai dai kuma da yake sun gaskanta cewa suna da ceto, suna<br />
ƙoƙari su yi rayuwa irin ta wanda yake da ceto. Amma domin basu da<br />
ceto, yana nufin cewa suna ƙaunar duniyar nan da dukan abinda ke<br />
cikinta da jikunansu da kuma zukatansu da dukan jin daɗin da duniya za<br />
ta basu. Saboda haka, ƙoƙarin rayuwa irin ta masu ceto wani aiki ne<br />
tuƙuru. A cikin zukatansu suna ƙaunar duniya, kuma domin sun gaskata<br />
cewa suna da ceto, kuma sun san cewa bai kamata su ƙaunaci duniya ba,<br />
rayuwa ta zamar masu da wahala da baƙin ciki. Tilas ne su yi rayuwa<br />
kamar ba su son duniya, amma suna matuƙar son wannan duniya.<br />
Matsala ta kan taso idan wani aboki ya mutu, abokin da bai damu<br />
da Littafi Mai-Tsarki ba, wanda kuma ya ke cin duniyarsa da tsinke. Bisa<br />
ga koyarwa irin ta al’ada dangane da shari’a, ya kamata ya sha azaba ta<br />
har abada a wuri da ake kira jahannama. Ko Wannan da muke bayani<br />
akansa wanda ya gaskanta yana da ceto, amma a hakikannin gaskiya ba<br />
shi da ceto, yayi wannan mummunar tunani cewa idan shi da kansa ya<br />
mutu, bashi da ceto bisa ga fahimta irin ta al’ada, dole a yi mashi<br />
hukunci na har abada a wani wuri da ake kira jahannama? Abin zai yi<br />
muni sosai.<br />
Duk da haka, yanzu mun koya cewa wannan irin tunani irin na<br />
al’ada na shirin hukuncin <strong>Allah</strong> kan masu zunubi bashi da makama. Yayi<br />
16
musun jinƙai da tausayi da adalcin <strong>Allah</strong> baki ɗaya. An tsara shi ne baki<br />
ɗaya bisa ga hikimar mutum. Ba bu gaskiya a ciki. Wannan fahimtar ta<br />
al’ada ta nuna a fili mugunta da rashin jinƙai wanda hali ne na mutumin<br />
da bashi da ceto. Zai yi daidai mu yi gargaɗi da cewa bai kamata mu<br />
taɓa ƙoƙarin fassara jinƙai, da adalcin <strong>Allah</strong> bisa ga tunaninmu da<br />
ra’ayinmu game da jinƙai da adalci ba. <strong>Allah</strong> ya bada wannan kyakyawan<br />
alkawari a cikin Mai-Wa’azi 8:5-6.<br />
Dukan wanda yake riƙe da dokar ba za ya kusanci wuta ba;<br />
zuciyar mai hikima kwa ta kan gane kwanaki da shari’a kuma<br />
gama ga kowane al’amari akwai nasa lokaci da shari’a domin<br />
ɓacin zuciyar mutum da nauyi ya ke a gareshi.<br />
Malaman tauhida da ɗaliban Littafi Mai-Tsarki sun shafe dubban<br />
shekaru suna karanta waɗannan kalaman ba tare da sun fahimta ba.<br />
Haka ta faru ne domin lokaci da shari’a suna da alaƙa da ƙarshen<br />
zamani. Kuma nufin <strong>Allah</strong> ne ya rufe irin wannan bayani, sai ƙarshen<br />
zamani (Daniel 12:4). <strong>Allah</strong> ya tabbatar mana da wannan, yayin da muke<br />
shaidar yardar <strong>Allah</strong>, a wannan lokaci na tarihi, da muke kusa da ƙarshen<br />
duniya ya bayyana da shaidu da yawa daidai rana da shekarar da duniyar<br />
nan zata ƙare. Saboda haka yau, kowanne mutum mai -hikima wato<br />
kowane mai-bi na gaskiya zai sani daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki shirin<br />
jadawalin <strong>Allah</strong> na tarihi daga farko har zuwa rana ta ƙarshe (dubi Mun<br />
Kusa Kai <strong>Ga</strong> Ƙarshe).<br />
Amma wannan alkawali na Mai-Wa’azi 8:5-6 kuma yayi maganar<br />
“Hukunci” wannan kalmar “Hukunci” wani lokaci ana amfani ita daidai da<br />
kalmar “Sharia” da “dokoki da farillai. <strong>Ga</strong> misali mun karanta a cikin<br />
Zabura 119:106 cewa, ‘‘...in yi biyayya da koyarwarka mai adalci.’’<br />
Duk da haka, ana amfani da kalmar nan ‘‘shari’a’’ ko ‘‘shari’u’’<br />
wajen nuna illar keta shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>. Wannan shine hanyar da aka yi<br />
amfani da ita a ayoyin Mai-Wa’azi da muke bincike yanzu, mun karanta<br />
cewa, “Domin ga kowane abu, akwai lokaci da shari’a”. Wato ga kowane<br />
abu akwai lokacin da za a kammala shi da kuma sakamakon cimma<br />
wannan manufar. Sakamakon shine shari’a ko hukumci, idan abinda<br />
muka aikata ya saɓawa dokar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Mun koyi cewa babbar koyaswa game da bayanin lokaci na Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki ya maida hankali kan ƙarshen lokaci, yayin da za a kammala<br />
dukan ayyukan shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>. Saboda haka zamu iya gane dalilan da ya<br />
sa aka haɗa lokacin da sharia a waɗannan ayoyin. Za a kammala dukan<br />
hukumcin <strong>Allah</strong> a ƙarshen duniya.<br />
Ba abin mamaki bane cewa <strong>Allah</strong> ya ƙara bayyana mana matsayin<br />
al’ada da yawancin majami’u suka ɗauka da suka koyar a dukan<br />
zamanin Ikklisiya (wato Kristi zai zo kamar ɓarawo da dare II Bitrus<br />
3:10). Daga cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki ne kaɗai zamu iya sanin ainihin rana<br />
da wata da kuma shekarar da al’amuran ƙarshen zamani zasu faru. Duk<br />
17
da haka, nufin <strong>Allah</strong> ne cewa a dukan zamanin Ikklisiya, majami’un<br />
zasu koyar da cewa Almasihu zai zo kamar ɓarawo da dare. Mun san<br />
wannan gaskiya ne domin mun karanta a cikin Ayukan Manzani 1:6<br />
cewa:<br />
Saboda haka da suka taru, suka tambaye shi suka ce, Ya<br />
Ubangiji a wannan lokaci ne ka ke mayar ma Isra’ila da mulki?<br />
Manzanin waɗanda suka jagoranci Ikklisiya ta farko, suna so su<br />
san lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> zai kammala dawo da mulkin <strong>Allah</strong>. A cikin<br />
tunaninsu, suna sa rai zai kafa mulki irin na duniya. Kristi ya amsa masu<br />
kamar yadda muka karanta a Ayyukan Manzani 1:7<br />
Ya ce masu, ba naku bane da za ku san zamani da wokatai<br />
waɗanda Uba ya sanya a cikin nasa hukumci<br />
Sannan Yesu ya ƙara koyaswa game da halayen mulki Ayyukan<br />
Manzani 1:8 na cewa:<br />
Amma za ku karɓi iko lokacin da Ruhu Mai-Tsarki ya zo bisanku;<br />
za ku zama shaiduna kuma cikin Urushalima, da cikin dukan<br />
Yahudiya da Samariya har kuma iyakar duniya.<br />
Waɗannan ayoyi uku, sun umurce mu da cewa a zamanin Ikklisiya<br />
akwai babbar tambaya game da ƙarshen lokaci. Duk da haka majami’u a<br />
zamanin Ikklisiya ba zasu yi sha’awar wannan batun ba, amma zasu<br />
maida hankali ne a kan aikin da aka basu, wato su aika bishara cikin<br />
dukan duniya. Saboda haka a cikin dukan shekarun nan 1,955, na<br />
zamanin Ikklisiya, bisa ga fahimtarsu, babu wanda ya san lokacin da<br />
zamani zai ƙare, amma Almasihu zai zo kamar ɓarawo da dare.<br />
Duk da haka, kusan ƙarshen duniya, za a ƙara marmarin sanin<br />
ainihin lokacin da duniya zata shuɗe. Saboda haka a kwanakin mu, <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ya buɗe idanun mu ga sanin cikakken lokacin da abubuwa na tarihi zasu<br />
faru, yadda zamu iya sanin ainihin rana, da wata, da shekara da ƙarshen<br />
zamani zai zo. Wannan ya ba masu bi na gaskiya damar gudanar da<br />
hakin da ya rataya a bisansu na faɗakar da duniya. Kowanne mai-bi mai<br />
tsaro ne. Mun karanta a cikin Ezekiel 33:2-7 cewa:<br />
Ɗan mutum, ka yi Magana da ’ya’yan mutanenka, ka ce masu,<br />
kaɗan an jawo ma wata ƙasa takobi, mutanen ƙasa kwa sun zaɓi<br />
mutum guda daga cikin su, sun maishe shi mai-tsaro domin su,<br />
shi ma, idan ya ga takobi ya faɗakar da mutane, dukan wanda ya<br />
ji ƙarar ƙafo ya ƙyale, idan takobi ya zo, ya fizga shi, alhakin<br />
jininsa yana bisa kansa. Ya ji busa, ya ƙyale; alhakin jinin sa yana<br />
bisa kansa ne, gama da ya kula da faɗaka, da ya tsira da ransa.<br />
Amma idan mai-tsaro ya ga takobi yana zuwa, ba ya yi busa ba,<br />
18
jama’a kwa ba su sami faɗaka ba, takobi ya zo ya fizge wani<br />
daga cikinsu; wannan mutum domin laifinsa an ɗauke shi amma<br />
zan nemi jininsa ga hannun mai tsaro. Hakanan kai fa ɗan<br />
mutum na sanya ka mai-tsaro ga gidan Isra’ila, domin wannan ka<br />
ji Magana ga bakina ka yi masu faɗaka daga gareni.<br />
A Tassalonikawa I 5:2-6 mun karanta game da juyawa daga koyaswar<br />
cewa Kristi zai dawo kamar ɓarawo da dare zuwa koyaswar cewa mu<br />
masu tsaro ne saboda haka shirin <strong>Allah</strong> yana kira zuwa ga sanin lokaci<br />
da sharia.<br />
Da yake lokaci da shari’a suna da dangantaka, wannan yana nufin<br />
ke nan sabuwar koyarwa daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki zata maye gurbin<br />
koyaswa irin ta ala’ada a kan shari’a?<br />
Wannan shine ainihin gaskiyar da muka tarar. <strong>Ga</strong>skiyar ita ce<br />
lokaci gaba ɗaya yana cikin tsarin shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>. Saboda haka,<br />
samun sanin tsarin lokacin da al’amura na tarihin duniya ya tilasta sake<br />
nazarin fahimta irin ta al’ada game da shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Watau, bashi yiwuwa a fahimci koyarwar Littafi Mai-Tsarki game<br />
da shari’ar sai dole mun fara koyo daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki game da<br />
lokacin daidai. Tun da <strong>Allah</strong> ya nuna mana bayanai masu yawa sababbi,<br />
bai kamata mu yi mamaki game da sabuwar gaskiya mai yawa da zamu<br />
koya yanzu ba.<br />
Yayin da daga ƙarshe <strong>Allah</strong> ya nuna mana tsarin abubuwan da<br />
zasu faru na ƙarshen duniya, ba kawai mun gane daidai ƙarshen zamani<br />
Ikklisiya kaɗai ba (21 Mayu, 1988) da kuma daidai tsawon lokacin<br />
matsanancin ƙunci (kwanakin 8,400 ko kuma shekaru 23 cikakku) amma<br />
kuma da lokacin ranar shari’a (Mayu 21, 2011 zuwa Octoba 21, 2011).<br />
Da wannan ainihin bayanin lokacin, nan da nan zamu hanzarta ƙara koyo<br />
sosai, game da illahirin shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>. Wannan ba abin mamaki<br />
bane domin, kamar yadda muka bayyana, Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya danganta<br />
lokaci da shari’a.<br />
Kafin mu yi nazarin shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> da kyau, zai dace muyi<br />
ɗan tsokaci game da lokacin tsanani da ke da alaƙa da ranar shari’a. Ka<br />
tuna zamanin Ikklisiya ya ƙare ranar 21 ga watan Oktoba, 1988, wanda<br />
kuma ita ce rana ta fari na kwanaki 8,400 da lokacin azaba. Yayinda<br />
kuma matsanancin ƙunci zai zo ƙarshe a ranar 21 Mayu, 2011 wadda<br />
ita ce rana ta fari ta kwanaki 153 na ranar shari’a. Akwai ayoyi guda biyu<br />
a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki da suka alaƙanta ranar tsananin da ranar<br />
shari’a. Ta farko ita ce Luka 21:22 in da muka karanta cewa:<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>ma waɗannan kwanakin na ramawa ne, domin a cika dukan<br />
abinda aka rubuta.<br />
Ta biyun kuma ita ce IBitrus 4:17:<br />
19
<strong>Ga</strong>ma lokaci yayi da shari’a zata faru a kan gidan <strong>Allah</strong>: Idan kwa<br />
a wajenmu ta faru, ina matuƙar waɗanda basu bi bisharar <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ba?<br />
“Gidan <strong>Allah</strong>” yana nufin dukan ’yan Ikklisiya da Ruhu Mai-Tsarki<br />
ya bari, kuma ya barsu ƙarƙashin mulkin shaiɗan. Ana hukunta su ne<br />
domin sun kauce ainun daga bishara ta gaskiya. Saboda haka suna<br />
ƙarƙashin shari’a. Amma wannan ya banbanta nesa, da ranar shari’a,<br />
watannin nan biyar daga 21 Mayu, 2011 zuwa Octoba 21, 2011. Lokacin<br />
da kowane mutum a dukan faɗin duniya zai karɓi hukunci na ƙarshe<br />
domin zunuban shi. Wannan hukumcin a gaskiya ma ba zai zo kan masu<br />
bi na gaskiya ba, waɗanda za’a fyauce su sadu da Kristi a ranar 21 ga<br />
Mayu, 2011.<br />
Lokacin tsananin, lokaci ne na gwadawa, musamman a majami’u<br />
amma kuma a cikin dukan duniya, lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> zai ware alkama<br />
(masu bi na gaskiya) daga ƙaya (waɗanda suke tsammani suna da ceto,<br />
amma a hakikannin gaskiya basu da shi).<br />
Ruya ta Yohanna 3:10 ta bayyana wannan lokacin a matsayin<br />
‘‘Sa’ar jaraba’’, Za a kuma iya fassara kalmar a matsayin ‘‘jaraba’’ ko<br />
“Jarabawa” mun koyi abubuwa da yawa game da gwaji, wanda <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
sa domin ya zama shaida a shakaru na ƙarshe. Sun ƙunshi koyaswa mai<br />
muhimmanci da tambayoyi kamar haka:<br />
1. Ko Ikklisiya zata iya nuna wa wani yadda zai sami ceto?<br />
2. Ko mun gane cewa a wannan lokaci <strong>Allah</strong> yana bayyana<br />
waɗansu sababbin bayanai da yawa daga Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki?<br />
3. Ko mun fahimci cewa kowace kalma ta harshen Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki ta ainihi ta fito ne daga bakin <strong>Allah</strong>?<br />
4. Littafi Mai-Tsarki baki ɗaya dokar <strong>Allah</strong> ne zuwa ga ’yan<br />
adam, kuma zai kawo hukunci idan ba a kiyayye shi ba.<br />
5. Zamanin Ikkilisiya ya ƙare a 1988, saboda haka babu<br />
wanda zai sami ceto muddin yana ƙarƙashin ikon<br />
Ikkilisiya A hakikanin gaskiya ma, <strong>Allah</strong> ya sa shaiɗan a<br />
Ikklisiyai yayi mulki a wurin. Saboda haka <strong>Allah</strong> ya umurci<br />
waɗanda suke son yiwa <strong>Allah</strong> biyayya su fito daga<br />
Ikklisiya.<br />
6. Dukan zamanin Ikkilisiya, nufin <strong>Allah</strong> ne da cewa masu bi<br />
na gaskiya zasu yi tunanin cewa Kristi zai dawo kamar<br />
ɓarawo da dare. Amma yanzu ya kamata masu bi na<br />
gaskiya su san ainihin rana, da wata, da shekarar<br />
zuwansa. Wannan ya basu damar fadakar da duniya da<br />
aminci, game da ƙarshen zamani. Idan mutane suka ci<br />
gaba da cewa zai dawo kamar ɓarawo da dare, zai sa su ci<br />
20
gaba da bin tafarkin da zai kaisu ga hallakar da zata abko<br />
masu farat ɗaya. (Tassalunikawa I 5:1-4).<br />
7. Dukan zamanin Ikkilisiya, <strong>Allah</strong> ya ƙyale aka ci gaba da<br />
tunani irin na al’ada wanda a cikin kuskure dangane da<br />
shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>. Amma yanzu <strong>Allah</strong> yana ƙara bamu<br />
haske game da gaskiyar shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>. Filin gwajin<br />
ne kuma, shin muna ƙaunar makiyanmu da gaskiya?<br />
8. Ana gwada dukan duniya, da shike ana faɗakar da su<br />
game da ƙarshen duniya mai zuwa, zasu ci gaba da musu<br />
kamar yadda aka yi a duniya a zamanin Nuhu, ko kuma<br />
waɗansu za su ji wannan faɗakarwar kamar yadda<br />
mutanen Nineveh suka yi lokacin da Yunana ya gargaɗe<br />
su game da halaka mai zuwa?<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya faɗa a cikin Ruya ta Yohanna 3:10 cewa zai tsare masu<br />
bi na gaskiya daga lokacin gwaji. <strong>Ga</strong> masu bi na gaskiya waɗanda suke<br />
da sha’awar yin biyayya da dokokin <strong>Allah</strong>. Jarabawar da aka lissafta a<br />
sama ba gwaji ba ne domin masu bin suna da niyyar yin biyayya. Amma<br />
ga marasa bi dake cikin Ikklisiyai da kuma duniya, ya kamata kowanne<br />
ɗaya daga cikin waɗannan jarabobi da gwaji su faɗakar da su cewa idan<br />
sun ƙi yin biyayya suna cikin haɗarin gaske da matsala gaban <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Abin alajibi, kwanaki 6,100 na ƙarshe daga cikin kwanaki 8,400<br />
na tsanani lokaci ne da ake ceton ɗumbin mutane da babu wanda zai iya<br />
ƙirgawa.<br />
Duk da haka, ya kamata mu koma kan bincike domin fahimtar<br />
ainihin tsarin shari’a na <strong>Allah</strong>. Zamu yi bincike mai zurfi a kan matsayin<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> na Alkalin dukan duniya a Sura ta gaba.<br />
21
Sura Ta Uku<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>, Alƙalin Dukan Duniya<br />
A cikin wannan binciken, muna ƙoƙarin sanin ainihin shirin<br />
hukuncin <strong>Allah</strong> domin wannan duniyar. Tilas ne shirin hukuncin ya haɗa<br />
da Alkali. Alƙalin <strong>Allah</strong> ne da kansa. Nan da nan a cikin zukatanmu zamu<br />
iya ganin hoton alƙali da wanda ake tuhuma a gaban sa. Alkali yakan<br />
saurara ya kuma yi nazari a kan shaida daga bakin shaidu da dama da<br />
kuma wanda ake tuhuma domin sanin ko wanda ake tuhuma ya aikata<br />
laifin ko babu, sannan ya yanke hukuncin da ya dace idan aka same shi<br />
da laifin da ake tuhumarsa da aikatawa.<br />
Haka ake ganin tsarin sharia yake a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki. A<br />
wannan tunannin, Alkalin shine Kristi. Waɗanda ake tuhumar kuma sune<br />
dukan waɗanda basu sami ceto ba. Lokacin shine ƙarshen duniya.<br />
Hukuncin zai kasance zaunawa cikin matsananciyar azaba a wani wuri da<br />
ake kira Jahannama.<br />
Yanzu muna koyo cewa wannan ra’ayi na al’ada bashi da<br />
makama. Yayinda aka amince da wannan ra’ayi dukan zamanin Ikklisiya,<br />
an kafa shi ne a kan abinda mutum ya fahimta da hukunci maimakon<br />
gaskiyar Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
Bisa adalci ga waɗanda ke riƙe da wannan ra’ayi, za mu iya gane<br />
cewa sun fahimci haka ne bisa ga yadda <strong>Allah</strong> ya rubuta Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki. Mun koyi cewa ba nufin <strong>Allah</strong> bane ya yi cikakken bayani game<br />
da shirinsa na ƙarshen duniya, sai duniyar ta kusan ƙarshe. Saboda haka<br />
da yake mun zo lokacin da duniya zata kawo ga ƙarshe, mun san ainihin<br />
ƙarshin lokacin. Haka kuma yanzu ne <strong>Allah</strong> yake yin cikakken bayyani<br />
game da shirin sa na sharia. Saboda haka a wannan lokaci da <strong>Allah</strong> yake<br />
buɗe idanunmu, mu san gaskiyar Littafi Mai -Tsarki da ba a taɓa<br />
bayyanawa ba a lokutan baya, Ya kamata mu koyi abin da Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki ya ke koyarwa game da aikin Alkali.<br />
A cikin littafin Alƙalawa dake Tsohon Alkawari, mun koya game<br />
da ayyukan alƙalai kamar su Joshua, Gideon, Jephthan, Samson da<br />
sauransu. Mun tarar cewa maƙasudin aikinsu shi ne hallaka maƙiyan<br />
Isra’ila. Watau hakinsu ne tanadar wa al’umma, salama da zaman lafiya.<br />
A cikin Sama’ila ta fari sura 8:20 mun karanta cewa Isra’ila ta roƙi<br />
sarki.<br />
Domin mu zama kamar dukan al’ummai; Sarkin mu shi hukunta<br />
mana shari’a, shi wuce a gaban mu, shi ɗauke mana yaƙoƙinmu.<br />
Daga kuma Alkalawa 2:16 <strong>Allah</strong> yace:<br />
Sai Ubangiji ya tayas masu da mahukunta, waɗanda suka ce ce su<br />
daga hannun masu washe su<br />
22
Za mu iya ganin wannan a furuci kamar haka:<br />
Zabura 7:8 Ya Ubangiji kai ne alƙalin dukan mutane. Ka<br />
shari’anta mani bisa adalci na...<br />
Zabura 7:11 <strong>Allah</strong> alƙali ne mai-adalci.<br />
Zabura 9:19: Ka zo ya Ubangiji kada ka bari mutane su gagare<br />
ka!<br />
Zabura 26:1: Ka hurta rashin laifina, ya Ubangiji, <strong>Ga</strong>ma na yi abin<br />
da suke daidai: Na dogara gare ka gaba ɗaya.<br />
Zabura 72:1- 4 Ka koya wa sarki a yi shari’a da adalcinka, ya<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>, ka kuma ba shi shari’arka, don ya yi mulkin jama’arka bisa<br />
kan shari’a, ya kuma bi da mulki da adalci... ya yiwa talakawa<br />
shari’ar gaskiya, ya taimaki waɗanda suke da bukata, ya kuma<br />
hukumta azzalumai.<br />
Zabura 103:6 Ubangiji yana gudanar da ayyuka masu adalci da<br />
hukunci ga dukan waɗanda a ke zalumtarsu.<br />
Romawa 14:10-11…gama dukan mu zamu tsaya a gaban<br />
kursiyin sharia na <strong>Allah</strong>. <strong>Ga</strong>ma an rubuta bisa ga raina in ji<br />
Ubangiji a gareni kowace gwiwa zata durƙusa. Kowane harshe<br />
kuma za ya yabi <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Korinthiyawa II 5:10: <strong>Ga</strong>ma dukan mu zamu bayyana a gaban<br />
dakalin shari’a ta Kristi.<br />
Ruya ta Yohanna 20:12: Na ga mattatu kuma, ƙanana da manya,<br />
suna tsaye a gaban kursiyin; aka buɗe littatafai, aka buɗe wani<br />
littafi kuma, littafin rai, ke nan aka yi ma mattatu shari’a kuma<br />
bisa ga abin da aka rubuta cikin littatafai gwargwadon<br />
ayyukansu.<br />
Mun koya daga waɗannan ayoyin cewa alkalin yana da haƙƙin<br />
mulki ko shugabancin, ya kuma ƙunshi tabbatar da laifi ko kuma rashin<br />
laifi yayin shari’a. Muna koyon cewa <strong>Allah</strong>, a matsayin alkalin dukan<br />
duniya, ya bada dokar <strong>Allah</strong>, Littafi Mai-Tsarki ɗungum, domin yin<br />
wannan aiki na samun mutane da laifi da kuma yanke masu hukumcin<br />
shiga jahannama. (Nan gaba zamu koyi cewa Jahannama ita ce mutuwa.)<br />
Amma dai ya kamata a sani cewa yayinda <strong>Allah</strong> yake mulkin<br />
duniya kowanne mai rai a duk tsawon rayuwar sa yana tsayawa a gaban<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> a matsayin Alƙalin duniya. <strong>Allah</strong> ne yake kare matalauci, da<br />
23
maraya, bisa ga ruhaniya, ta wurin kalmarsa kuma yana sauko da<br />
hukumci duk lokacin da aka aikata zunubi. Yayin da <strong>Allah</strong> yake mulki a<br />
matsayin alƙali bisan dukan duniya, Yana ɗaukar matakai da dama<br />
domin cimma burinsa na sarauta. <strong>Ga</strong> waɗansu misalai kamar haka:<br />
1. <strong>Allah</strong> ya hukunta zaɓɓabu kafin kafuwar duniya. Ya ɗora<br />
hukumcin su a kan Kristi wanda yake ɗan ragon da aka<br />
yanka tun kafawar duniya (Ruya ta Yohanna 13:8).<br />
2. <strong>Allah</strong> ya rubuta dokar <strong>Allah</strong> (Littafi Mai-Tsarki), wanda ya<br />
danganta da <strong>Allah</strong> kansa (Kalmar ta zama jiki (Yohanna<br />
1:14) ta haka ya ba kalmar <strong>Allah</strong> iko daidai da <strong>Allah</strong><br />
domin kalmar <strong>Allah</strong> ta zartas da hukunci.<br />
3. Ya kafa dokar da ta bayyana cewa Yesu Kristi shine<br />
babban Firis wanda ya miƙa Dan Ragon, kuma shine Ɗan<br />
Ragon da aka yi hadaya da shi.<br />
4. Ya tabbatar da gaskiyar nan mai-ban mamaki cewa kunya<br />
da la’ana da Yesu Ɗan Rago na <strong>Allah</strong> ya jimre, yayin da<br />
ya biya bashin zunuban zaɓaɓɓu, za a ganta a fuskar<br />
dukan mutanen duniya. <strong>Allah</strong> ya rubuta duk waɗannan<br />
abubuwan a cikin littafi Mai-Tsarki domin dukan duniya<br />
su karanta.<br />
5. Ya umurta cewa sakamakon biyayyar masu bi na gaskiya<br />
musamman kamar yadda aka nuna tashin mattatu,<br />
hukumci ne kan marasa ceto, musamman waɗanda suke<br />
da Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
6. Yana sauke sarakuna, ya kuma tada sarakuna.<br />
7. Yana mulki a kan dukan al’amuran mutane.<br />
8. Shi yake kafa lokaci na tarihi, ya kuma tabbatar da<br />
cikaken tsarin shari’a.<br />
9. Babu wani abu da yake faruwa, a ko’ina cikin duniya a<br />
kowanne lokaci na tarihin duniya ba tare da sani ko<br />
izininsa ba.<br />
10. Za mu koyi cewa dukan ayyukan Kristi a matsayin alƙalin<br />
dukan duniya a ranar shari’a shine ya kai dukan masu bi<br />
na gaskiya zuwa cikin sama lafiya, ya kuma ƙarasa<br />
hukuncinsa a bisa marasa bada gaskiya na duniya.<br />
11. A matsayin alƙali da mai-mulkin duniya, ya ba shaiɗan<br />
waɗansu ayyuka na mulki ya kuma bashi ikon shiga sama<br />
lokacin shekaru 11,000 na tarihi. Kristi ya kuma kori<br />
shaiɗan daga sama ya ƙwace ayyukansa na mulki da<br />
dama, yayi nasara bisansa a kan giciye.<br />
12. <strong>Allah</strong> ya kuma kafa shaiɗan a cikin Ikklisiyai domin yayi<br />
mulki a kan kowacce Ikklisiya a cikin kwanakin nan 8,400<br />
na babban tsanani da kuma kwanaki 153 na ranar shari’a.<br />
24
Hakika, a matsayin <strong>Allah</strong> na alkali da mai-mulki, aikinsa ya wuce<br />
kasancewa alƙalin mutane da aikinsa yake neman mai-laifi ko mai-<br />
gaskiya.<br />
Tsarin Shari’a Na <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Yanzu da yake mun koya game da ayyukan da dama da aka sa<br />
ƙarƙashin <strong>Allah</strong> a matsayin Sarki, a matsayin mai iko bisansu da kuma<br />
alkalin dukan duniya, yanzu sai mu yi tunani a kan hukuncin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
yanke a kan zunubi. Mun koya daga cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki da cewa<br />
akwai manyan fannoni guda biyar na wannan hukumcin Mai-tsanani.<br />
Suna nan kamar haka:<br />
1. Mutuwar “Rai a cikin Kristi”. An halicci ɗan adam da rai a cikin<br />
Kristi wanda muke kira rai na ruhaniya. Da wannan rai na<br />
ruhaniya ne aka hallice Adamu da duk ’yan adam. Sai dai an<br />
ba ɗan adam sharaɗi. Idan suka yi zunubi, zasu rasa<br />
wannan rai su kuma zama mattatu cikin ruhaniya. Irin<br />
wannan ran ne muke da shi lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya bamu sabon<br />
rai rayayye, sai dai, a wannan lokacin ana kiransa rai na har<br />
abada domin an shafe duk zunuban mu da jinin Kristi.<br />
Amma lokacin da Adamu yayi rashin biyayya, ya zama<br />
matacce cikin ruhu. Yanzu bashi da sauran rai a cikin Kristi.<br />
Shi da sauran mutanen da suka fito daga zuriyarsa sun zama<br />
mattatu cikin ruhaniya, mattatu cikin kura-kurai da zunubi.<br />
2. Mutuwa ta jiki da ruhu, da muke kira mutuwa ta jiki.<br />
3. Babban kunya.<br />
4. Asarar gado na mulkin <strong>Allah</strong>, da zamu zauna tare da Kristi<br />
har abada.<br />
5. Hallaka da ta bada lamunci cewa wanda aka hukunta ba zai<br />
sake rayuwa ba ko ta jiki ko ta ruhaniya.<br />
A Ruyata Yohanna 20:11-13 karanta:<br />
Na ga kuma babban farin kursiyi, da wanda ke zaune a bisansa<br />
wanda duniya da sama suka guje ma fuskata: ba a kwa samu<br />
masu wuri ba. Na ga mattatu kuma ƙanana da manya, suna tsaye<br />
a gaban kursiyin, aka buɗe littatafai aka buɗe wani littafi kuma<br />
littafin rai ke nan, aka yi wa mattatu shari’a kuma bisa ga abinda<br />
aka rubuta cikin littatafai gwargwadon ayyukansu. Teku kuma ya<br />
bada matattun da ke cikinsa, mutuwa da hades kuma suka bada<br />
mattatun da ke cikinsu, aka yi masu shari’a kuma kowane mutum<br />
gwargadon ayyukansa.<br />
25
Wannan shine hoton (hoto mai kusurwa uku), waɗanda ba<br />
zaɓaɓɓu ba (waɗanda <strong>Allah</strong> bai yi niyar ceto ba), tsayawa a gaban <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Akwai farin kursiyi wanda ya nuna <strong>Allah</strong> ne kaɗai mai-mulki, alƙalin<br />
dukan duniya. <strong>Allah</strong> ne kaɗai wanda zai iya zaunawa (yana mulki) a kan<br />
kursiyi, wanda a matsayin mai- mulki mafi ɗaukaka zai kawo ƙarshen<br />
duniya, wanda daga sama da ƙasa zasu shuɗe daga fuskarsa.<br />
Mattatu suna tsaye a wurin, a gaban <strong>Allah</strong>. Kowane bil’adama,<br />
duk tsawon rayuwarsa, yana tsaye a gaban <strong>Allah</strong>. A wannan karon,<br />
dukan waɗanda suke matattu cikin ruhaniya tun daga lokacin da suke<br />
cikin Adamu (a cikin Adamu duka matattu ne, I Korintiyawa 15:22).<br />
Wannan yana nufin ko da shike suna raye na ɗan ƙaramin lokaci, basu da<br />
rai a cikin Kristi daga lokacin da aka haife su. Su mattatu ne cikin<br />
ruhaniya. A wannan hoton muna ganin littatafai a buɗe waɗanda suke<br />
ɗauke da bayanan zunubansu. Ana yankewa waɗannan mutanen<br />
hukumci duk lokacin da suka yi zunubi, domin <strong>Allah</strong> yana amfani da<br />
dokarsa da aka yi amfani da ita, wanda shine Littafi Mai-Tsarki wajen<br />
zartar da hukumci. Ana yi masu shari’a da dokar <strong>Allah</strong> duk lokacin da<br />
suke aikata zunuban da aka rubuta a cikin waɗannan littatafai.<br />
Akwai kuma littafin rai. Sunayensu ba su cikin littafin rai. Saboda<br />
haka ba nufin <strong>Allah</strong> bane ya cece su. Dukansu suna ƙarƙashin hukuncin<br />
mutuwa, daga ƙarshe kuma zai bayyana a fili cewa ba zasu sake rayuwa<br />
ba da yake za a jefa su cikin ƙorama ta wuta. A cikin Ruya ta Yohana 20:<br />
a aya ta 12 da 13 wannan kalmar “An hukuntasu” tana koya mana cewa<br />
ana ci gaba da hukumta su. Saboda haka wannan ayar ta 13 tana koya<br />
cewa a wannan hoton, waɗanda basu da ceton da suka riga suka mutu<br />
suna cikin kabari, suna ƙarƙashin hukumcin <strong>Allah</strong> da yake Maganar <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ta kashe su. A matsayin matakin ƙarshe na ci gaba da shari’a <strong>Allah</strong> a<br />
ranar shari’a, za’a fitar da su daga kaburbura domin kumyatarwa ta<br />
ƙarshe, za a kuma hallaka su har abada.<br />
A cikin Ruya ta Yohanna 20:13, mun karanta game da waɗanda<br />
suke cikin teku. Ya yiwu ana magana ne a kan waɗanda suka mutu cikin<br />
ruhaniya da suke da rai ake kuma misaltawa da iskar teku. (Ishaya<br />
57:20; Yahuda 13), ko kuma zai iya kasancewa waɗanda suka hallaka a<br />
cikin teku, kamar waɗanda suka hallaka a ruwan tsufana a zamanin<br />
Nuhu. Bugu da ƙari, waɗanda suka mutu suna jahannama ko kuma suka<br />
mutu suna kabari (wato waɗanda har yanzu suke raye amma mattatu ne<br />
a ruhaniya, tare da waɗanda suka rigaya suka mutu kuma an binne su),<br />
za’a kawo su zuwa kunya ta ƙarshe a gaban <strong>Allah</strong> ranar shari’a.<br />
Daga ƙarshe, za a jefa mutuwa da jahannama ko kuma mutuwa<br />
da kabari a cikin ƙorama ta wuta. Mun karanta a cikin IKorintiyawa<br />
15:16 cewa:<br />
Mutuwa ce maƙiyi na ƙarshe da za a kawas.<br />
26
Nan gaba za mu koyi cewa ana kiran mutuwa ta biyu ƙorama ta<br />
wuta, kuma tana jaddada cewa marasa ceto ba zasu sake farfaɗowa ba<br />
ko kuma su rayu. Sun daina rayuwa.<br />
Mene ne Jahannama?<br />
Kalmar da aka fi dangantakawa da shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> kan masu<br />
zunubi itace kalmar “Jahannama” mene ne zamu koya game da wannan<br />
kalmar a Littafi Mai-Tsarki? Za a iya samunta fiye da sau 30 a cikin<br />
Tsohon Alkawari kuma a ko da yaushe kalmar Ibraniyanci ce “Sheol” An<br />
kuma fassara kalmar nan ‘‘sheol’’ fiye da sau 30 a matsayin kalmar nan<br />
‘‘kabari’’, sau uku a matsayin kalmar nan ‘‘rami’’.<br />
A cikin Sabon Alkawari, ana fassara kalmar nan “hades” ta<br />
Helenanci a matsayin ‘‘Jahannama’’ wani lokaci kuma za a iya fassara ta<br />
da ‘‘kabari’’, Banda haka kuma, waɗansu lokatai kalmar ‘‘jahannama’’<br />
tana fitowa ne daga kalmar Helenanci ‘‘gehenna’’ wadda ta sami asali<br />
daga kalmar Helenanci ‘‘tartaroo’’<br />
Za a iya fassara kalmar Ibraniyanci “sheol” da kalmar Helenanci<br />
“hades” a matsayin ‘‘jahannama’’ ko ‘‘kabari’’ bisa ga abinda ake<br />
magana a kai. Waɗansu lokatai fassarar ta danganta kan abinda ake<br />
magana akai, wanda yake nuna dangantakar kalmomin nan “kabari” da<br />
‘‘jahannama’’. Dukan kalmomin biyu suna da dangantaka da mutuwa.<br />
Za mu fi ganewa da haka inda muka karanta cewa “Hakkin zunubi<br />
mutuwa ne” (Romawa 6:23) da kuma “wanda yayi zunubi shi za ya<br />
mutu”. (Ezekiel 18:20). Ya goyi bayan abinda ke cikin I Korinthiyawa<br />
15:26 “Maƙiyi na ƙarshe da za’a kawas mutuwa ne” ya kuma sa aka<br />
fahimci Ruyata Yohanna 21:1 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Na ga sabuwar sama da sabuwar duniya kuma: gama sama ta<br />
fari da duniya ta fari sun shuɗe; teku kuma ba shi<br />
Sau da dama ana amfani da wannan kalmar ‘‘teku’’, a cikin Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki a matsayin hoto ko kuma a bayyana ‘‘jahannama’’. Misali,<br />
Aladun nan 2,000 da miyagun ruhohin suka shiga cikin su sun hallaka a<br />
cikin teku (Markus 5:13). Babu sauran mutuwa ko jahannama idan shirin<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> na shari’a ya ƙare. Mutuwa da jahannama zasu shuɗe.<br />
Ya kamata mu gane cewa jahannama da kabari abu guda ne. Da<br />
yake kabari yana da alaƙa da mutuwa. Wannan ya kawo mu ga tambaya<br />
ta gaba: Mene ne ƙorama ta wuta?<br />
Ƙorama ta Wuta<br />
An ambaci ƙorama ta wuta a cikin ayoyi biyar na Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki. Ayoyin sune:<br />
27
Ruya ta Yohanna 19:20 Aka kama bisan tare da shi kuma mai -<br />
ƙaryar annabci wanda ya kan aika alamu a gabansa, irin da ya<br />
kan ruɗi masu karɓan shaidar bisan, da waɗanda ke sujada ga<br />
gumkinsa: ake jefa su biyu da rai cikin ƙorama ta wuta mai ci da<br />
kibiritu.<br />
Ruya ta Yohanna 20:10 Ibilis kuma da ya ruɗe su, aka jefas da shi<br />
cikin ƙorama ta wuta da kibiritu, inda su bisan da mai ƙaryan<br />
annabci suke kuma, za a wulakance su dare da rana har zuwa<br />
zamanin zamunnai<br />
Ruya ta Yohanna 20:14-15 kuma aka jefas da mutuwa da hades<br />
cikin ƙorama ta wuta, mutuwa ta biyu ke nan, watau ƙorama ta<br />
wuta. Kuma wanda aka iske ba a rubuta shi cikin littafin rai ba,<br />
aka jefas da shi cikin ƙorama ta wuta.<br />
Ruya ta Yohanna 21:8: Amma ga matsorata, da marasa<br />
bangaskiya, da masu ƙazamta, da masu kisan kai, da fasikai da<br />
masu sihiri da masu bautan gumaka, da dukan maƙaryata,<br />
rabonsu yana cikin ƙorama mai ƙonewa da wuta da kibiritu,<br />
mutuwa ta biyu ke nan.<br />
Abu mai muhimmancin shine, Ruya ta Yohanna 20:4 ta nuna<br />
cewa an jefas da mutuwa da hades (ko kuma mutuwa da kabari) cikin<br />
ƙorama ta wuta. Zaka iya tunawa mun koya a I Korintiyawa 15:16 cewa<br />
“Maƙiyi na ƙarshe da za a hallaka shine mutuwa. Amma mun koya a cikin<br />
waɗannan ayoyin cewa an jefas da mutuwa cikin ƙorama ta wuta, wadda<br />
ake kira mutuwa ta biyu (Ruyata Yohanna 20:14) Banda haka kuma mun<br />
koya daga Ruya ta Yohanna 21:1 cewa idan aka kafa sabuwar sama da<br />
sabuwar duniya, teku (hades da mutuwa) ba za su kasance ba. Saboda<br />
haka ƙorama ta wuta tana nuna ƙarshe kwata kwata.<br />
Nan gaba a cikin wannan bincike, zamu koyi cewa Ubangiji Yesu<br />
Kristi ya mutu sau biyu dangane da aikin ceton. Ya mutu kafin kafuwar<br />
duniya a matsayin Ɗan Rago da aka yanka (Ruyata Yohanna 13:8). Ya<br />
kuma mutu lokacin da yake kan giciye, ya nuna mana da kuma duniya<br />
yadda ya biya bashin zunuban mu. Ninka hukumcin sa ya yi daidai da<br />
tsarin da ke shifiɗe a cikin farawa 41:31 watau abinda aka ninka sau<br />
biyu tabbatacen abu ne daga <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Haka kuma, <strong>Allah</strong> yayi Magana game da yin hukuncin sau biyu a<br />
kan waɗanda basu da ceto a cikin Irimiya 17:18 da Ruya ta Yohanna 18:6<br />
inda muka karanta:<br />
Ku saka mata kamar yadda ta bayas, ku saka mata gwargwadon<br />
ayyukanta, riɓi biyu: cikin ƙoƙo wanda ta dama, ku dama mata so<br />
biyu.<br />
28
<strong>Allah</strong> ya nuna a cikin Ruya ta Yohanna 18:8.<br />
Domin wannan fa rana ɗaya alobanta za su zo, mutuwa, da kewa<br />
da yunwa, za’a ƙone ta sarai da wuta; gama Ubangiji <strong>Allah</strong> maiƙarfi<br />
ne wanda ya shari’anta mata.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> yana koya mana a cikin wannan aya cewa a rana ɗaya,<br />
wadda zata kasance ranar shari’a, za a yi mutuwa da fari, za a ƙona ta<br />
da wuta. Konawa da wuta yayi daidai da abinda ke cikin II Bitrus 3:10<br />
inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Amma ranar Ubangiji kamar ɓarawo zata zo; a cikinta fa,<br />
sammai zasu shuɗe tare da ƙara mai-girma, rundunan kuma<br />
zasu narke da ƙuna mai zafi, duniya kuwa da ayukan da ke<br />
cikinta zasu ƙone.<br />
Ƙonawa da wuta wadda ta kasance mutuwa ta biyu, ta danganta<br />
mutuwa ta biyu da ƙorama ta wuta. Wannan ne lokaci na ƙarshe da ta<br />
tabbatar da cewa ba za a sake samun wata damar rayuwa ba. Ya<br />
danganta da kalmar nan ta helenanci “gehenna” da ake samu jefi-jefi a<br />
cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki wanda aka fassara da kalmar “jahannama”. Misali,<br />
mun karanta a cikin Markus 9:43-44 cewa:<br />
Kuma idan hanunka ya sa ka kayi tuntuɓe, ka yanke shi, gwamma<br />
a gareka ka shiga cikin rai ɗungum da ka tafi jahannama da<br />
hannunka biyu, cikin wuta wadda bata bituwa. Wurin da tsutsar<br />
su bata mutuwa ba, kuma wuta bata bituwa ba.<br />
Wutar da bata bituwa ita ce ƙorama mai-ƙonewa. Ambaton wuta<br />
a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya na daidai da abinda aka faɗa a cikin<br />
Ibraniyawa 12:29 inda aka kira <strong>Allah</strong> “wuta mai cinyewa” idan wutar <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ta cinye mutum, wannan mutum ba zai sake rayuwa ba.<br />
Nan gaba zamu koya cewa wannan kalmar “tsutsarsu bata<br />
mutuwa” wannan kalmar tsutsa tana da dangantaka da kunya. Cewa ba<br />
kawai tana nufin kumyatar da waɗanda basu da ceto ta wajen yanke<br />
masu hukumcin mutuwa ba, kuma ba mawuyacin abu bane share<br />
wannan kunya. Haka nan wannan kalmar “wutar bata bituwa” ya nuna<br />
cewa ba zai sake rayuwa ba.<br />
Tilas ne mu tuna cewa a cikin Adamu, an halicci ɗan adam duka<br />
domin ya rayu har abada, ko da yake akwai sharaɗi. Duk da haka,<br />
saboda zunubi, ‘yan adam suka zama masu mutuwa. Amma muddin an<br />
halicce shi a kamanin <strong>Allah</strong> ya rayu har abada, zai yiwu wani lokaci nan<br />
gaba bayan ya biya bashin zunuban sa zai iya rayuwa kuma? amsar ita<br />
ce, a’a! Domin jadada wannan batun <strong>Allah</strong> yayi Magana game da wutan<br />
jahannama wanda bata bituwa, da hallaka ta har abada, da tsutsa da<br />
29
ata mutuwa, da kuma hayaƙi hayaƙin azabar su da yake hawa sama har<br />
abada. Dukan waɗannan kalmomin suna nuna mutuwa ta biyu ce,<br />
ƙorama mai ƙonewa. Wutar da hallakar da hayaƙin da tsutsar, suna nan<br />
har abada inda babu sauran rai.<br />
Waɗannan kalaman sun nuna cewa hakika babu sauran wata<br />
rayuwa ga waɗanda basu da ceto. <strong>Ga</strong>skiyar ita ce an rigaya an ƙona su<br />
gaba ɗaya, saboda haka babu wani tunanin cewa zasu sake wata rayuwa.<br />
An jadada bayanin daina rayuwa ta marasa ceto a ayoyi da dama cikin<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Misali a cikin waɗannan ayoyin.<br />
Nahum 1:6,8 Wanene ya iya tsayawa a gaban haushinsa? Wake da<br />
iko shi daure zafin fushinsa? Hasallarsa tana zuba kamar wuta,<br />
yana fasa ruwa rana tsaka. Amma da rigyawa mai malalawa za ya<br />
sa wurin ya ƙare, sarai za ya ci duddugen maƙiyansa har cikin<br />
dufu.<br />
Malachi 4:1: <strong>Ga</strong>ma ga shi rana tana zuwa tana ƙuna kamar<br />
tanderu; dukan masu girman kai, da dukan waɗanda ke aikin<br />
mugunta, zasu zama tattakai ranan dake zuwa kuma zata<br />
ƙoƙƙone su, in ji Ubangiji mai runduna, har ba zata bar masu<br />
tushe ko reshe ba.<br />
Ishaya 10:23: <strong>Ga</strong>ma Ubangiji, Yahweh mai-runduna, za ya aika<br />
cikakiyar ƙarewa ƙadararriya ce kuwa, a tsakiyar dukan duniya.<br />
Kalmar Ibraniyanci da aka fassara da ‘‘cikakkiyar ƙarewa’’ an<br />
kuma fassara ta a matsayin ‘‘cinyewa’’ ko ‘‘ƙarshe’’. Mun karanta a cikin<br />
Irimiya 46:28 cewa:<br />
Kada ka ji tsoro ya Yakub, bawana inji Ubangiji, gama ina tare da<br />
kai, gama zan ƙarasa al’umman nan inda na kore ka, sarai<br />
dukansu, amma ba zan ƙarasa ka ba; amma zan yi maka horo da<br />
shari’a, ba kwa zan bar ka ba horo ba.<br />
Har wa yau, an yi amfani da kalmar nan “lalacewa’’ kimanin sau<br />
100 a cikin Tsohon Alkawari da kuma sau 30 a Sabon Alkawari. Kowace<br />
aya tana jaddada ƙarshen rayuwa. Misali: Ayuba 4:20 ta ce:<br />
A tsakanin safiya da yamma a kan farfashe su, sukan lalace har<br />
abada, ba mai kulawa.<br />
Har wa yau, an yi amfani da waɗannan kalmomin “halaka” da<br />
“Hallakarwa” fiye da sau 500 a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
A wani ɓangaren kuma, ba bu kalmar nan ‘‘azaba’’ a cikin<br />
Tsohon Alkawari, kuma sau 22 aka yi amfani da ita a cikin Sabon<br />
30
Alkawari. Mun gane da cewa yanayin da aka yi amfani da kalmar ya<br />
danganta daga waɗannan.<br />
1. Azabar marasa bi yayin da suke jin bisharar gaskiya (Ruya ta<br />
Yohanna 11:10).<br />
2. Azaba irin ta rashin lafiya (Matta 8:6, Matta 4:24).<br />
3. Azaba ta harbin kunama (Ruyata Yohanna 9:5).<br />
4. Kalmar Helenanci da aka fassarata “Azaba” an kuma fassara<br />
ta da ‘‘ɓacin zuciya’’ ko kuma ‘‘fushi’’, lokacin da Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki yayi Magana game da ruhun Lutu mai-adalci da ya<br />
‘‘fusata’’sabili da zunuban Saduma. (Bitrus II 2:8).<br />
5. A helenanci wannan kalmar “azaba” an fassarata “Baƙin ciki”<br />
(Luka 2:48, Ayyukan manzani 20:38).<br />
6. Azaba da wuta (Ruya ta Yohanna 14:10, Luka 16:24).<br />
Mun koyi cewa ƙarshen shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> mutuwa ce. Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki ya goyi bayan wannan bayanin ta wajen amfani da kalamai kamar<br />
“lalacewa” “hallakarwa”. Za a kuma iya gane cewa an yi amfani da<br />
kalamai kamar, ‘‘mutuwa’’, da ‘‘mutu’’, fiye da sau 1,300 a cikin Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki. Ba abin mamaki bane da Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya bayyana da<br />
cewa maƙiyi na ƙarshe da za a hallaka shine mutuwa. (Korintiyawa<br />
15:26)<br />
Mai Arziki Da La’azaru<br />
Yanzu zamu sake nazarin misalin mai-arziki da La’azaru wanda<br />
ke cikin Luka 16. Rashin fahimtar wannan misali ya kawo rashin<br />
fahimtar tsarin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Misalin yayi bayani a kan mutane biyu. Mai-arziki yana da duk<br />
abin jin daɗi da wadata da wannan duniya zata iya kawowa, amma ba shi<br />
da ceto. Matalauci La’azaru baya da waɗannan abubuwan jin daɗi na<br />
wannan duniya amma yana da ceto. Daga ƙarshe dukansu suka mutu,<br />
aka binne mai-arziki shi kuma La’azaru mala’iku suka ɗauke shi zuwa<br />
ƙirjin Ibrahim (Luka 16:22). Kasancewa a ƙirjin Ibrahim hoto ne na<br />
kasancewa a wuri mafi albarka a gaban <strong>Allah</strong>. A binne kuma shine a sa<br />
mutum a kabari.<br />
Misali kuma ya ci gaba da magana tsakanin mai- arzikin da ya<br />
mutu da Ibrahim (<strong>Allah</strong>) wanda yake cikin sama. Ka tuna mun koya cewa<br />
kabari da mutuwa daidai suke da jahannama. Saboda haka ba kuskure<br />
bane a ce mai arziki yana jahannama (Luka 16:23). Amma tilas ne mu<br />
gane cewa ɗaga idanunsa ya ga la’azaru a ƙirjin ibrahim, ya kuma yi<br />
magana da Ibrahim duka misali ne. Watau, <strong>Allah</strong> ya shimfiɗa waɗansu<br />
jadawalin tunani ko kuma hotuna masu kusurwai uku, domin ya koya<br />
gaskiyar ruhaniya. Waɗannan gaskiyar sun ƙunshi koyaswa kamar haka:<br />
31
1. Mai-arziki ya roƙi Ibrahim, ya aiki la’azarun da ɗikon ruwa<br />
domin ya sanyaya harshen sa (Luka 16: 24) babu jinƙai ko<br />
alheri ga waɗanda suka mutu ba tare da sun sami ceto ba.<br />
2. Akwai babban rami tsakanin sama da jahannama, sama, rai<br />
na har abada ne, jahannama, mutuwa ce ta har abada babu<br />
yadda waɗanda suka mutu zasu sake rayuwa.<br />
3. Mai-arzikin yana son Ibrahim ya aiki la’azaru zuwa wajen<br />
’yan’uwansa guda biyar domin yana tsammani wannan<br />
mu’ujiza zata sa su zama masu bi. <strong>Ga</strong>skiyar ita ce, suna da<br />
Musa da sauran annabawa, da kuma Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Idan<br />
ba za su gaskata da Littafi Mai-Tsarki ba ba za su gaskanta<br />
ba ko sun ga manyan mu’ujizai.<br />
4. Mai arzikin yana shan azaba a cikin wuta, An yi amfani da<br />
kalmar Helenanci da aka fasara ta da ‘‘Azaba’’ a aya 24<br />
kawai, a ya 25 (‘‘kana shan azaba’’), a cikin Luka 2:48, da<br />
Ayyukan Manzanni 20;38. kalmar nan ‘‘harshen wuta’’ tana<br />
jadada cewa <strong>Allah</strong> ne yake hukumta mai-arzikin, wanda shi<br />
wuta ne mai-cinyewa (Ibraniyawa 12:29). Kalmar nan<br />
‘‘azaba’’ wadda, aka bayyana ta wurin amfani da ita a cikin<br />
Ayukan Manzani 20:28 da Luka 2:48, tana nuna yadda azaba<br />
da yake sha ta ke. Saboda haka zamu duba a hankali wannan<br />
kalmar yadda aka yi amfani da su a cikin ayoyin nan biyu.<br />
Ayukan Manzani 20:38, Suna baƙin ciki tun ba ma saboda<br />
maganarsa da ya faɗa ba, cewa ba za ku ƙara ganinsa ba. Daga<br />
nan suka rako shi har bakin jirgi.<br />
Luka 2:48 Sa’anda suka ganshi fa suka yi al’ajibi, uwa tasa kwa ta<br />
ce masa, ɗana, don menene kayi mana haka? <strong>Ga</strong> ubanka da ni da<br />
baƙin ciki muka neme ka.”<br />
A cikin waɗannan ayoyin, kalmar da aka fasara a matsayin<br />
‘‘azaba’’ a cikin luka 16 an fasara ta da ‘‘baƙin ciki’’. Wannan baƙin cikin<br />
baya da nasaba da ciwon cikin jiki. Baƙin cikin rashin sake ganin<br />
ƙaunatattace ne. Mai-arzikin yana cikin azaba domin yana baƙin ciki ba<br />
zai sake samun murna da jin daɗin da ya samu lokacin da yake raye a<br />
duniya ba; yayinda La’azaru kuma yake nan lafiya da albarku masu girma<br />
har abada abadin.<br />
Watau, wannan misali na mai-arziki da la’azaru bai koya mana<br />
wani abu game da azaba ta har abada a wani wuri da a ke kira<br />
Jahannama ba. Yana koya mana game da hukumcin rasa duk albarkun<br />
wannan rayuwa da rasa duk albarkan rai na har abada. Misali ya taimaka<br />
mana mu fahimci halin da Isuwa ya shiga. Shi ɗan fari ne. Saboda haka<br />
yana da gadon haihuwa da ya ƙunshi ruɓi biyu na gado. Duk da haka ya<br />
32
wulakanta gadonsa na haihuwa ya sayar da shi a bakin ƙwaryar abinci<br />
(Farawa 25:29-34)<br />
A cikin Adamu, duk ’yan Adam suna da ’yancin ɗan fari, gadon<br />
ɗan fari wanda ya ƙumshi rabo biyu na ɗan fari Yesu yayi bayani a<br />
misalin da ya bayar na ɓataccen ɗa. An faɗawa babban ɗan a cikin Luka<br />
15:31 “ɗana tuntuni kana tare da ni, dukan nawa kwa naka ne”. <strong>Ga</strong>don<br />
haihuwar ya ƙunshi rabo na ɗan fari (kubawar sharia 21:17) “Dukan abin<br />
da nake da shi naka ne” ya ƙunshi rai na har abada kuma magada tare da<br />
Kristi. (Romawa 8:17)<br />
Saboda wannan zunubin da aka misalta da ƙwaryar abinci, mun<br />
rasa gadon haihuwarmu. Mun rasa ’yancin rayuwa cikin Kristi, wadda<br />
take rai na har abada ga cetattu. Mun rasa ’yancin zama magada tare da<br />
Kristi na sabuwar sama da sabuwar duniya. Wannan shine babban<br />
hukumcin da za mu biya sabili da zunuban mu.<br />
Kalmomi ba zasu iya misalta babbar asarar da marar ceto ya yi ba<br />
idan zunubi ya sa ya rasa rai madawwami tare da Kristi, ba kuma zai yi<br />
mulki tare da Kristi har abada ba kuma zai yi gado tare da shi ba a<br />
sabuwar sama da sabuwar duniya. Babu shakka wannan zai kasance<br />
babban ɓangare na azaba da waɗanda suka shiga wata biyar na ƙarshen<br />
duniya zasu fuskanta. Zasu kuma tarar cewa domin an barsu a baya<br />
lokacin fyaucewa, ba za su taɓa samun komi ba na gadon haifuwarsu.<br />
Za a kuma iya kiran baƙin ciki da azaba na mai-arziki a kabari,<br />
Jahannana, ya ƙara mana haske kan babbar azaba (baƙinciki) da zai<br />
kasance tsakanin miliyoyin ’yan Ikklisiya waɗanda suka hakikanta cewa<br />
suna da ceto amma aka barsu a baya lokacin fyaucewa. Ba abin mamaki<br />
bane kamar yadda muke koya yanzu, suna kuka suna cizon haƙora, suna<br />
yiwa <strong>Allah</strong> saɓo. Mun koyar cewa, babban abinda waɗanda suka gane<br />
cewa sun rasa shiga cikin mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> har abada, zasu yi shine baƙin<br />
ciki mai tsanani. An kuma koya wannan daga abinda Isuwa ya yi wanda<br />
ya wulakanta gadon haihuwarsa ya sayar wa Yakub domin ƙwaryar<br />
abinci. Mun karanta a cikin Ibraniyawa 12:16-17 cewa:<br />
Kada wani mai-fasikanci ya kasance, ko kuwa wani marar-ibada<br />
kamar Isuwa, wanda saboda ƙwaryar abinci ɗaya kaɗai ya sayar<br />
da gadonsa, na ɗan fari. <strong>Ga</strong>ma kun sani, ko da yana marmarin ya<br />
gaji albarkar daga baya, aka ƙi shi, gama ba ya sami zarafin tuba<br />
ba, duk da yake ya nema da naciya da hawaye.<br />
Akwai kimanin mutane biliyan biyu a yau da suke kiran kansu<br />
“Krista” kuma yawancinsu suna da alaƙa da Ikklisiya. Yayin da muke<br />
duba Ikklisiyoyin da suke kewaye da mu, kusan dukan Ikklisiyan sun<br />
kasa gaskatawa da gargaɗin da Littafi Mai-Tsarki yake yi masu game da<br />
ficewa daga Ikklisiya domin <strong>Allah</strong> ya daina amfani da Ikkilisya wajen kai<br />
Bishara. Har yanzu yawancin su sun gaskanta da cewa Kristi zai dawo<br />
kamar ɓarawo da dare, kuma ba zamu san ainihin ranar ƙarshen zamani<br />
33
a. Yawancin su sun dogara ne a kan bishara ta yi da kanka, kuma basu<br />
gane da gaskiyar cewa Kristi ya yi duk abinda ake bukata domin<br />
cetonmu ba. Yawancin su suna da ra’ayin nan na fahimtar tsarin shari’ar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> da ke karkatacciyar koyaswa cewa a rana ta ƙarshe za a yiwa<br />
marasa ceto hukumci su kuma zauna a wani wuri da ake kira jahannama<br />
har abada.<br />
Kimanin ’yan Ikklisiya biliyan biyu zasu gane a ranar 21 ga watan<br />
Mayu, 2011 cewa, an barsu a baya. Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya bayyana cewa<br />
baƙin cikinsu zai kasance kamar baƙin cikin (azaba) na mai-arziki da<br />
muka gani a cikin misalin da muka bincike. Mun karanta a cikin Luka<br />
13:28 cewa:<br />
Can za a yi kuka da cizon haƙora, lokacin da kun ga Ibrahim, da<br />
Ishaku, da Yakub, da dukan annabawa cikin mulkin <strong>Allah</strong>, ku da<br />
kanku kuwa an fitar da ku waje.<br />
Idan ranar shari’a ta fara ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011, a duk<br />
faɗin duniya, za a canza jikunan miliyoyin masu bi na gaskiya zuwa<br />
jikunan ruhaniya na har abada a kuma fyauce su zuwa sama, a gaban<br />
idanun waɗanda aka bari a baya. Bugu da ƙari, za a buɗe kaburbura a<br />
duk duniya zasu bubbuɗe, za a canza jikunan masu bi na gaskiya a<br />
kuma fyauce su zuwa sama. Wannan ya ƙunshi, jikunan, Ibrahim, Ishaku<br />
da Yakub. ’Yan Ikklisiyar da aka bari a baya za su yi mamakin ganin cewa<br />
suna ƙarƙashin fushin <strong>Allah</strong>. A cikin tsananin baƙin ciki, zasu yi kuka,<br />
suna kuma cizon haƙora, suna nuna tsananin fushinsu da <strong>Allah</strong>. Zai<br />
zama wani lokacin baƙin ciki mai-tsanani ga dukan ’yan Ikklisiya.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana wannan a cikin ayoyi da dama, misali, Matta<br />
8:11-12, Matta 13:49-50, Matta 13:41-42, Matta 25:30 waɗansu daga<br />
cikin ayoyin nan sun jadada cewa ana kiran wurin inda za a yi kuka da<br />
cizon haƙora. Su jefa su cikin buyar wuta, can za a yi kuka da cizon<br />
haƙora. Wannan yayi dadai da ƙorafin mai-arziki a cikin Luka 16:24. ‘‘...<br />
gama azaba na ke ji (baƙin ciki) a cikin wannan wuta. Ka tuna cewa <strong>Allah</strong><br />
wuta ne mai cinyewa (Ibraniyawa 12:29). Kasancewa a ƙarƙashin<br />
fushinsa, kamar shiga cikin wuta mai ci ne.<br />
Ta haka mun koya ta wurin wannan misalin inda aka nuna<br />
mataccen yana Magana da <strong>Allah</strong> a sama (Ibrahim), an ba mu cikaken<br />
bayani game da illar fushin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Hukumcin mafi muni mai kunyatarwa kuma da za a yanke a kan<br />
duk wani laifi shine hukuncin kisa. Babu wani ciwo a jiki dake da nasaba<br />
da hukuncin kisa, zai je, amma duk da haka ana ganinshi a matsayin<br />
hukunci mafi tsanani, Mene ne ya sa ya zama haka?<br />
Haka ta faru ne domin an ƙwace ’yancin rayuwa ga mutumin da<br />
aka aiwatar da hukumcin kisa mai kunyatarwa. Zai iya kashe kansa. Zai<br />
iya sadaukar da ransa a fagen yaƙi ko kuma ya hau tsauni. Zai iya biyan<br />
laifin da ya aikata wajen zama a gidan kaso. Amma da zarar ’yan adam<br />
34
sun zartar da hukunci irin na wulakanci a kansa, za a ɗauke ransa, ya<br />
zama wanda ya fuskanci abinda ake bayyanawa a matsayin hukunci maitsanani.<br />
Ba lallai mu iya sanin wannan ba, amma hukuncin kisan da aka<br />
yanke mashi a duniya wani darasi wanda yake nuna yadda hukuncin<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> zai kasance kan zunubi. A hakikanin gaskiya ma, <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana<br />
a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki hukunci kisa mafi ƙanƙanci da aka taɓa tunani.<br />
Wannan hukumcin kisan kuma yana da dangantaka da ceton mu. Babu<br />
shakka muna magana ne a kan mutuwar Mai-albarka Ubangijin mu da<br />
Mai-Ceton mu. Saboda haka ya kamata mu dubi mutuwar sa a hankali<br />
domin ba kawai zamu koyi yadda kumyata ya yi daidai da tsarin<br />
hukumcin <strong>Allah</strong> daga ciki ba, amma zamu ƙara koyo game da hukunci<br />
da shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> bisa zunubi.<br />
35
Sura Ta Huɗu<br />
Yaushe Ne Kristi Ya Mutu?<br />
Bayani na farko mai-ban mamaki da muka koya yayin da muke<br />
bincika a hankali game da abin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya koya mana a cikin Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki akan aikin ceto shine an gama baki ɗaya kafin <strong>Allah</strong> ya halicci<br />
mutum. Mun karanta a cikin Ruya Ta Yohana 13:8 ‘‘...Ɗan Ragon da yake<br />
yankakke tun kafawar duniya.’’ Mun karanta a cikin Ibraniyawa 4:3 cewa:<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>ma mu da muke bada gaskiya muna shiga cikin wannan hutu,<br />
kamar yadda ya ce, yadda na yi rantsuwa cikin fushina, ba za su<br />
shiga cikin hutuna ba, ko da aka gama ayyukan tun kafuwar<br />
duniya.<br />
Mun kuma karanta a cikin matta 25:34 cewa:<br />
Sa’annan shi sarki za ya ce ma waɗannan da ke hannun damansa,<br />
ku zo, ku masu albarka na ubana ku gaji mulkin da an shirya<br />
domin ku tun kafuwar duniya.<br />
Waɗannan ayoyin sun koya mana a fili cewa an gama dukan<br />
ayyukan da ake bukata domin ceton mu tun kafuwar duniya.<br />
Yanzu za mu iya sanin iya fahimtar ayoyin da suka yi magana a<br />
kan shi a matsayin ‘‘Haifaffe shi kaɗai” Haifa na da mafari. Sai dai Kristi<br />
yana nan tun fil-azal(kolosiyawa 1:17) Saboda haka ba shi da farko.<br />
Amma mun karanta a cikin Romawa 1:4 cewa:<br />
Aka aiyana, shi Ɗan <strong>Allah</strong> da iko, ta wurin Ruhu Mai-Tsaki bisa<br />
ga tashi daga mattattu shi Yesu Kristi Ubangijinmu.<br />
A kolosiyawa 1:18 mun karanta cewa: shi... Haifar fari daga cikin<br />
mattatu.” Bisa ga waɗannan ayoyi, an tashi Kristi daga mattatu.<br />
Bisa ga waɗannan ayoyin, an tashi Kristi daga matattu. Kuma da<br />
yake shine Ɗan Ragon da aka yanka (kashe) tun daga kafawar duniya,<br />
dole ne ya kuma tashi daga matattu tun kafuwar duniya. Za a fahimci<br />
‘‘Daga kafawar’’ a matsayin “kafin kafuwar’’ domin mun karanta a<br />
Ibraniyawa 1:2 cewa:<br />
A ƙarshen waɗannan kwanaki ya yi mana Magana cikin ɗansa<br />
wanda ya sanya magajin abu duka wanda kuma ya yi duniya ta<br />
wurinsa.<br />
Tun da yake tashin Kristi daga mattatu shine aikin ceto na ƙarshe<br />
mun sani yayinda muke karantawa cikin Ibraniwa 1:2, cewa tunda Kristi a<br />
36
matsayin Ɗan ya sa aka aiwatar da aikin ceto kafin halitta. Aikin <strong>Allah</strong> ne<br />
kammala wannan aikin duka, sai dai tilas ya kasance gaskiya gaba ɗaya<br />
domin Littafi Mai-Tsarki gaskiya ne. Domin haka zamu fahimci ayoyi<br />
kamar haka:<br />
Timottawus 1: 9-10 ta ce: wanda ya cece mu, ya kiraye mu kuma<br />
da kira mai-tsarki, ba gwargwadon ayyukan mu ba, amma bisa<br />
ga nasa nufi, da Alheri, wanda aka bamu cikin Kristi Yesu tun<br />
gaban madawaman zamani, amma yanzu ya bayyana ta wurin<br />
bayyanuwar mai-ceton mu Kristi Yesu wanda ya kawas da<br />
mutuwa, ya haskaka rai da dauwama ta wurin bishara.<br />
Ibraniyawa 1:5 <strong>Ga</strong>ma ga wanene daga cikin mala’iku ya taɓa yin<br />
magana ya ce masa, kai ɗana ne yau na haife ka? Da kuma ni<br />
zama uba gareshi, shi kuma za ya zama ɗa a gareni?<br />
Yohanana 1:18 Ba wanda ya taɓa ganin <strong>Allah</strong> daɗai, haifaffe shi<br />
kaɗai wanda ke cikin ƙirjin uba, shine ya bada labarinsa.<br />
Matta: 3: 17 <strong>Ga</strong> kwa murya daga cikin sammai ta ce, wannan<br />
ɗana ne ƙamnatacce na, wanda raina, yaji daɗinsa sarai.<br />
Kristi Ya Nuna Abinda Yayi Domin Ya cecemu<br />
Amma, idan Kristi yayi dukan aikin domin ya ceci waɗanda ya<br />
zaɓa ya cece su (zaɓaɓɓu) kafin ya halicci duniya, menene ya sa ya sake<br />
mutuwa a kan giciye? <strong>Allah</strong> ya amsa wannan tambayar a cikin Luka 3:6<br />
inda <strong>Allah</strong> yace:<br />
Dukan mai rai kwa zaya ga ceton <strong>Allah</strong>’<br />
A cikin Bitrus 1, 1:20 ya kara cewa:<br />
wanda aka rigaya saninsa lallai gaban kafuwar duniya, amma a<br />
ƙarshen zamani ya bayyanu sabili da ku.<br />
Bayyana na nufin a gani, a nuna shi, a gwada. <strong>Allah</strong> yayi tanadi<br />
domin cetonmu, a cikin wani aiki na ƙauna da ya fi ƙarfin fahimtar<br />
mutum. Ya aiko da Yesu wannan duniyar a cikin jiki ya kuma nuna wa<br />
duniya abinda ya riga yayi domin biyan bashin zunuban zaɓɓaɓu.<br />
Kristi ya yi Magana da misalai. Waɗansu lokatai misalan suna<br />
kama da hotuna masu kusurwa uku dake bayyana gaskiyar Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki. Ka tuna da wannan hoton na mai-arziki a cikin kabari da ake<br />
kira jahannama, da yake magana da Ibrahim, wanda yake wakiltan <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Yana baƙin ciki domin yayi asarar komi da kuma kasancewa yana<br />
37
fuskantar fushin <strong>Allah</strong>. Shi kuma La’azaru da yake ƙirjin Ibrahim yana da<br />
komai, wato, rai na har abada. Yana da cikakken kariya kuma magajin<br />
mulki da kristi.<br />
Wannan hoton ƙarami ne idan aka kwatanta shi da hoton rayuwar<br />
Ubangijinmu Yesu kristi inda ya wakilci kansa, A wannan hoton mun<br />
ganshi ya ɗauke jiki irin namu da aka haife shi ta wajen budurwa<br />
Maryamu. <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana wannan a cikin Ibraniyawa 10:4-7 inda muka<br />
karanta cewa:<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>ma bashi yiwuwa jinin bajimai da na awaki shi kawas da<br />
zunubai. Domin wannan sa’anda yana shigowa cikin duniya yace,<br />
da hadaya da baiko ba ka so ba, Amma, jiki ka shirya mani;<br />
Hadayu tuli na ƙonawa da na zunubi baka ji daɗin su ba?<br />
Sa’annan na ce gani na zo (cikin littafi an rubuta a kaina) garin in<br />
aika nufinka ya <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Idan ka yarda ka lura da juyawa da aka yi daga hadaya da<br />
bayaswa zuwa kan Yesu da kansa, wanda ya kasance jikin da aka shirya<br />
domin ya nuna abin da ya faru kafin kafuwar duniya.<br />
Saboda haka, lokacin da Yesu ya tafi giciye, bai je wurin domin ya<br />
biya bashin zunubanmu ba. An biya wannan bashin fiye da shekaru<br />
11,000 da suka wuce. Amma a cikin ƙaunarsa mai girma yana shirye ya<br />
sha wahalar fushin <strong>Allah</strong> a madadin waɗanda ya zo domin ya ceta domin<br />
mu gani da idanun mu (ta wurin Littafi Mai-Tsarki), babban abinda ake<br />
bukata a biya.<br />
Yanzu za mu iya gane dalilin da yasa yace ‘‘Ya Ubana, idan zai<br />
yiwu ka ɗauke min wanan ƙoƙo, ba nawa nufin ba amma bari na ka nufin<br />
shi kasance”( matta 26:35), ya kuma yi tambaya cewa: ‘‘ya <strong>Allah</strong>na ya<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>na don me ka yasheni?’’ (Matta 27:46). Shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> bata bukatar<br />
biyan bashin cettatu sau biyu. Wannan ƙari ne wanda bashi da anfani,<br />
wani muhimmin aikin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya yi. <strong>Allah</strong> ya rigaya ya shirya haka. Musa<br />
(dokar <strong>Allah</strong>) ya buga dutsen (Kristi) sau biyu, (Littafin Lissafi 20:11)<br />
bayan bugu ɗaya kawai ake bukata ya kawo ruwa. (Fitowa 17:6) Ishaya<br />
40:2 tana cewa:<br />
Kuyi Magana mai kwantad da rai ga Urushalima, kuyi mata kira,<br />
yaƙinta ya ƙare, an gafarta laifinta gama daga hannun Ubangiji ta<br />
karɓi alhakin dukan zunubanta riɓi biyu.<br />
Yanzu mun gama cewa Kristi ya sha wahala sau ɗaya domin<br />
zunubanmu, kuma ya sha wahala ta biyu domin ya nuna mana yadda ya<br />
biya bashin zunubanmu. Yanzu za mu iya gane dalilin da ya sa Bilatus,<br />
mai mulki na Roma ya yi ta maimaitawa akai, akai cewa ‘‘ban same shi<br />
da wani laifi ba ( Luka 23:4-22, Yohanna 19:4-6 da kuma Matta 27:4-<br />
24). Kristi ya tsaya a gabansa marar laifi ko kaɗan. Amma duk da haka<br />
38
tilas a hukumta shi kamar wanda har yanzu yake ɗauke da zunuban<br />
waɗanda aka kiraye su zuwa ga ceto domin ya nuna yadda ya sha<br />
wahala sabili da waɗannan zunuban. Abin mamaki shi ne babban firist<br />
ɗin ne ya yankewa Yesu hukumci. Matta 20:18 ta ce:<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>shi zamu Urushalima, kuma za a ba da Ɗan Mutun ga hannun<br />
manyan malamai da marubuta, zasu hukunta masa mutuwa.<br />
Yahanna 11:50-51 ta ce:<br />
Ba ku lura kuma yana da amfani a gare ku mutun da ya mutu<br />
saboda jama’a kada al’umma duka ta lalace wannan batu fa ya<br />
faɗa ba bisa kansa ba amma domin shi baban malami ne<br />
shekaran nan yayi annabci Yesu zaya mutu saboda al’umman.<br />
kuma a cikin Yohanna 19:17 mun karata cewa:<br />
Yahudawa suka amsa suka ce masa muna da doka bisa ga<br />
wannan doka kwa ya kamata shi mutu domin ya maida kansa<br />
Ɗan <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
A ko ina cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki babban Limami misalin Yesu ne<br />
babban Limami. Hakin babban Limami ne ya yanka rago.<br />
Saboda haka Bilatus gwamna ne, wanda yake da ikon yankewa<br />
Yesu hukuncin kisa domin ya farantawa Yahudawa rai, ya bada umarni<br />
cewa a kashe Yesu ta hanyar giciyewa. Giciyewa bisa ga dukan alamu, ita<br />
ce hanyar kisa mafi kunyatarwa da mutum ya shirya. Mun koyi<br />
muhimman darussa guda uku game da giciye Yesu. Da waɗannan:<br />
1. Kunya, da la’ana da azaba da Kristi ya daure don zunuban<br />
mu.<br />
2. Kunya da la’ana da tilas za a ɗora bisa waɗanda ba a cece su<br />
ba da kuma ƙarin azaba da za’a jimre ga waɗanda zasu shiga<br />
da rai ranar sharia.<br />
3. Abin mamaki na gafara na dab da ƙarshe.<br />
Lokacin da aka giciye Kristi, ya zama abin nuni ga jama’a na<br />
mutumin da yake ƙalƙashin la’anar <strong>Allah</strong>. Domin mu gane<br />
muhimmancin la’ana, bari mu dubi itacen ɓauren nan da Yesu ya la’anta<br />
(Markus 11:14). An la’anta itacen ɓauren da yake wakiltar al’umar Isra’ila<br />
duk zamanin Tsohon Alkawari lokacin da Kristi ya ce “kada kowa ya ci<br />
‘ya’ya daga wurinka, nan gaba har abada.’’ Saboda haka la’anar itacen<br />
ɓauren yana koya mana cewa an hallaka al’umar Isra’ila har abada, ba<br />
kuma za a sake amfani da ita ba a matsayin hanyar samun albarka ta<br />
ruhaniya.<br />
39
Kazalika, yayin da aka la’anta ’yan adam domin zunubansu ya<br />
nuna cewa dole ne a yi masu cikakken hukunci yadda dokar <strong>Allah</strong> ta<br />
tanada, hukuncin da ƙarshen sa shine hallaka ta har abada. Mun karanta<br />
a cikin Kubawar shari’a 28:20 cewa:<br />
Ubangiji za ya aiko maka da la’ana da damuwa da tsautawa, cikin<br />
dukan abinda ka ke sa hannu gareshi, har ka hallaka, ka lalace da<br />
sauri, saboda muguntar ayyukanka inda ka yashe ni.<br />
Daɗin daɗawa, mun karanta a cikin Kubawar sharia 28:45 cewa:<br />
Kuma dukan waɗannan la’anoni zasu aike maka har ka hallaka<br />
domin ba ka lura da muryar Ubangiji <strong>Allah</strong>nka ba, da zaka kiyaye<br />
dokokinsa da farillansa waɗanda ya umurce ka da su.<br />
Wannan la’anar ce aka ɗorawa Yesu lokacin da aka biya bashin<br />
zunuban mu kafin kafuwar duniya: daga baya ya nuna wannan la’anar<br />
lokacin da aka rataye shi a kan giciye kamar yadda <strong>Ga</strong>latiyawa 3:13 ta ce<br />
Kristi ya fanshe mu daga la’anar shari’a da ya zama la’ana<br />
maimakon mu gama an rubuta kowanne wanda an rataye shi ga<br />
itace la’ananne ne.<br />
Saboda haka, za mu iya sani yayin da muke duban Yesu a kan<br />
giciye ƙarƙashin la’anar <strong>Allah</strong>, wannan yana nufin duk wanda ba shi da<br />
ceto, zai ƙarasa da hallaka ta har abada.<br />
Bari mu duba a hankali, munin kallon giciye Yesu. Kamar yadda<br />
muka faɗa aiwatar da hukumcin kisa ta wurin giciye ita ce hanya mafi<br />
tsanani da rashin imani, cike da ƙeta, marar kyaun gani wadda kuma ta<br />
fi kunyatarwa da ake ƙwace ’yancin mutum na rayuwa daga gareshi.<br />
Akwai zafin ƙusoshin da aka buga ta hannuwa da ƙafafunsa. Akwai<br />
kunyar ƙwace wa mutum tufafi a giciye shi tsirara, Akwai batun zama<br />
abin kallo ga jama’a, inda jama’a masu yawa ’yan kasar sa, da kowanne<br />
mutum a duniya zasu ga kumyatarsa. Akwai kuma gaskiyar nan cewa<br />
zai shafe sa’oi da yawa yana daure baƙaƙen maganganu da ba’a daga<br />
waɗanda suke so su kashe shi. Alal hakika babu wani hukumcin kisa da<br />
yafi na giciye kunyatarwa.<br />
Idan muka dubi Golgotha inda aka giciye Yesu, mun ga giciye<br />
guda uku. Guda biyu daga cikinsu mutane ne da suka aikata laifi<br />
waɗanda aka aiwatarwa hukumcin kisa ta wannan hanyar kunyatarwa. A<br />
tsakaninsu, a kan giciye na uku, aka giciye dukan wanda Yesu ya zo<br />
domin ya ceta. A’a ba wai muna wurin da kanmu bane. Mai-Cetonmu,<br />
Ubangiji Yesu Kristi ne yake rataye a wurin yana nuna mana cewa, shine<br />
ya tsaya a madadinmu. Wannan ce mutuwar da dama zamu jimre sabili<br />
40
da zunubanmu. Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya bayyana a fili cikin <strong>Ga</strong>latiyawa 2:20<br />
cewa “An giciye ni tare da Kristi”.<br />
An lisafta Yesu tare da masu zunubi (Ishaya 53:12, Markus<br />
15:28). Nufin <strong>Allah</strong> ne ya nuna mana a fili shirinsa na shari’a. Da farko,<br />
ka tuna cewa a giciye yana nufin la’anar <strong>Allah</strong>. Duk abinda ya faru a<br />
Golgota inda giciyen suke yana cike da la’anar <strong>Allah</strong> a kanmu inda za a<br />
iya hallaka mu har abada. Muna gani a fili mutuwa mafi ban kunya da za<br />
mu iya tsammani. Masu laifin guda biyu da suke wakiltar dukan<br />
mutanen duniya, suna dab da ɗanɗana hukuncin da doka ta ayyana.<br />
“<strong>Ga</strong>ma hakkin zunubi mutuwa ce” (Romawa 6:23) Suna ƙarƙashin la’anar<br />
doka. Doka ta yanke masu hukumcin kisa mai kunyatarwa da mutuwar<br />
la’ana. Dubban mutane suna mutuwa ta hanyoyi dabam dabam, amma<br />
babu wadda ta fi kunyatarwa kamar mutuwar giciye. Idan sun mutu, ba<br />
zasu sake rayuwa ba. Saboda haka zasu yi asarar gado na rai na har<br />
abada da kuma gadon sabuwar sama da sabuwar duniya. Sun biya<br />
babban bashin daɗin da suka ji, tun da suka aikata zunubi a wannan<br />
rayuwar.<br />
Mun koyi cewa babban hukuncin zunubi shine asarar farin ciki da<br />
albarkun wannan rayuwa da kuma gadon mulkin <strong>Allah</strong>, wanda ya ƙunshi<br />
rai madawami da gadon sabuwar sama da sabuwar duniya. <strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne<br />
waɗanda suka mutu kafin tashin mattatu ba su san wannan ba. Amma<br />
gaskiya ce kamar yadda misalin mai arziki da la’azaru yake koyarwa a<br />
Luka 16. Lokacin da mai arzikin ya ga La’azaru a ƙirjin Ibrahim, wanda<br />
yake jan idannunmu na ruhaniya zuwa ga madawamin gadon mai-bi,<br />
ya kwatanta wannan da rayuwar azaba da yake ciki inda ba zai ƙara jin<br />
daɗin rayuwar da ya yi a lokutan baya ba, ba kuma zai sami wannan<br />
farin ciki da murna na gadon ruhaniya ba. Hakika yana baƙin cikin gaske<br />
domin wannan fushin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Kamar yadda muka koya, sanin wannan babbar asarar gadon<br />
shine abin da zai faru da biliyoyin mutanen da za su shiga ranar shari’a a<br />
wata biyar na ƙarshen zamani. Yayin da suke raye, zasu ga masu bi na<br />
gaskiya lokacin da ake fyauce su zuwa ɗaukaka, su kuma zasu ci gaba<br />
da zama a duniya a cikin mummunan kwarin nan na mutuwa. Wannan ya<br />
tabbatar da cewa zunubi ya ƙunshi asarar gado. Kasancewa waɗansu sun<br />
mutu ba tare da sanin cewa zasu yi asarar gadonsu ba, bai sake gaskiyar<br />
cewa sun rasa gadon nan nasu mai daraja sabili da zunubansu a<br />
matsayin hukunci ba.<br />
Ya Ƙare<br />
Hoto mai kusurwa uku da ake da shi wanda ya nuna yadda Yesu<br />
ya ɗauke fushin <strong>Allah</strong> sabili da zunubanmu ya ƙare lokacin da Yesu yace<br />
“Ya Ƙare”. Babbar azaba ce Kristi ya sha karo na biyu. Sai dai a lokaci na<br />
biyu ba wai ƙoƙari yake yi ya biya bashin zunubanmu ba.<br />
41
Amma domin ya nuna mana da kuma masu mulki da ikoki yadda ya sha<br />
wahala kafin kafawar duniya domin ya biya cikakken bashin.<br />
Sa’oi uku da aka yi na duhu, kafin Kristi ya ce ‘‘Ya <strong>Allah</strong> na, Ya<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>na don me ka yashe ni?” ya ƙunshi hakikanin gaskiyar cewa, a<br />
farkon zamani, Kristi ya biya cikakkken bashin zunuban mu, ya mutu ya<br />
kuma sake tashi. An bayyana wannan gaskiya a fili cikin Zabura 16:10.<br />
‘‘<strong>Ga</strong>ma ba zaka bar raina ga lahira ba” Lahira mutuwa ce. Saboda haka<br />
kafin a kammala biyan bashin zunuban mu, dole ne Kristi ya tashi daga<br />
mattatu. Shi ya sa daga wancan lokacin Kristi zai zama za a kira shi Ɗan<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> kamar yadda muka karanta a Romawa 1:4. lokacin da yayi kuka a<br />
kan giciye yace: “Ya Kare” wannan yana nufin an cika wannan hoto mai<br />
kusurwa uku, da ya bayyana azabar Kristi ya ƙare.<br />
Amma, kuma kafin yace ya ƙare, akwai wata gwadawa. Ita ce abin<br />
ban mamakin na sa’oin nan uku lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya juyawa Kristi baya.<br />
Sa’oin nan uku na baƙin duhu ya nuna mummunar azabar da Kristi ya<br />
jimre.<br />
Sai dai, <strong>Allah</strong> ya tanada wani hoto domin ya nuna a fili gaskiyar<br />
cewa ya mutu kuma an tashe shi daga matattu, hoto ne mai kusurwa<br />
biyu. Kashi na farko ya nuna kaburburan da aka bubbuɗe. Bayan tashin<br />
Yesu daga mattatu ranar lahadi da safe, jikuna da dama sun fito daga<br />
kabarbaru suka shiga birni mai-tsarki. (Matta 27:51-53) Wannan birnin<br />
mai- tsarki zai zama sama ne domin lokacin da labulen haikali ya tsage,<br />
lokacin da Kristi yake kan giciye haikalin ya daina kasancewa wuri maitsarki.<br />
Saboda haka Urushalima ta daina kasancewa birni mai-tsarki<br />
Sabuwar Urushalima ce birni mai-tsarki, ita ce birnin samaniya. Saboda<br />
haka jikunan nan da aka tada daga matattu alama ce ta fyaucewa. Amma<br />
kamar yadda <strong>Allah</strong> ya sha nanatawa a IKorintiyawa 15, da ba a tashi<br />
Kristi daga mattatu ba, da ba za a tashi kowa daga mattatu ba. Saboda<br />
haka tashin waɗannan jikuna daga matattu ranar lahadi da safe, ya nuna<br />
cewa babu shakka Kristi ya tashi daga mattatu.<br />
Amma akwai kuma wani ɓangaren hoton, da aka bayar domin a<br />
tabbatar da cewa babu shakka Kristi ya tashi daga mattatu. A cikin<br />
ruhunsa Kristi, ya tafi sama, jikinsa ba tare da ruhunsa ba aka sa a<br />
kabari. Yayin da yake cikin kabari, jikinsa bai ga ruɓa ba. Ba zai ga ruɓa<br />
ba domin idan ya ruɓe, zai nuna cewa aikin da Kristi yayi, domin biyan<br />
bashin zunuban zaɓɓaɓu tun kafin kafuwar duniya, bai ƙare gaba ɗaya<br />
ba. Saboda haka tashin Kristi daga mattatu zai zama misali kawai.<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>skiyar ita ce, lokacin da aka sa jikinsa a cikin kabari, a cikin<br />
rayuwar ruhunsa, yana sama. Saboda haka a wannan hoton, <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
nuna misalin fyaucewa ta wurin tashin ainihin jikinsa daga kabari, da<br />
kuma ainihin jikunan da suka tashi wanda aka buɗe lokacin da labulen<br />
haikali ya tsage.<br />
Amma kafin mu bar wannan hoton na wahalar da kunya da<br />
la’anar masu laifi da Kristi ya sha, ya kamata mu dubi waɗansu<br />
ɓangarorin gwadawar.<br />
42
<strong>Ga</strong>fara Mai Ban Al’ajibi<br />
Idan za’a hukunta mai laifi sabili da laifinsa, za a iya zartar masa<br />
da hukuncin wulakanci na kisa. Babu wani begen yafe hukuncin kisa sai<br />
ko da cikakken umurnin shugaba. A ƙasashe da dama na duniya har da<br />
Amurka, mai mulki mafi girma yana da ikon gafartawa mai-laifin da aka<br />
zartarwa hukuncin kisa. Saboda haka, kafin aiwatar da hukumcin<br />
‘yan’uwan mai-laifin za su yi duk ƙoƙarinsu domin ya sami wannan<br />
gafaran don a ceto shi daga wannan mutuwar wulakanci da kunya da<br />
aka shirya dominsa. Babu shakka, wani lokaci akan yafewa mai laifi ana<br />
dab da lokacin da za’a aiwatar da hukuncin kisan.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya tanada irin wannan gafara ga duk waɗanda ya zo domin<br />
ya ceta. An bayyana wannan da yau a cikin littafin Ishaya 54:7-8 inda<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> yace:<br />
Don lokaci ƙanƙani na yashe ki, amma da jinƙai mai-girma zan<br />
dawo da ke. A cikin hasala mai-zafi na ɓoye maki fuskata ɗan<br />
lokaci kaɗan amma da madauwamin alheri zan yi maki jinƙai in ji<br />
Ubangiji mai-fansar ki.<br />
Kuma a Ishaya 55:7-8<br />
Mai mugunta shi sake hanya tasa, mara adalci kuma shi bar<br />
tunaninsa, shi komo wurin Ubangiji shi kwa zaya ji ƙansa wurin<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>nmu, gama zaya yi gafara a yalwace. <strong>Ga</strong>ma kamar yadda<br />
sammai suna nisa da duniya, haka nan kuma al’amura na sun fi<br />
naku tsawo, tunani na kuma ya fi naku, in ji Ubangiji.<br />
A daidai kusan ƙarshen zamani, ɗaya daga cikin ɓarayin da aka<br />
giciye su tare da Kristi, ya ji kalmar nan ta alheri daga leɓen Yesu “yau<br />
kana tare da ni a firadais” (Luka 23:43). Ina misalin al’ajibin! Wannan<br />
ranar da a wurinsa ta kasance ranar mutuwar ta ƙasƙanci na mai-laifin ta<br />
ƙarasa da shiga gida cikin daraja na Ɗan <strong>Allah</strong>. Wannan gafarar ce<br />
kowanne zaɓɓaɓe na <strong>Allah</strong> yake samu.<br />
43
Sura Ta Biyar<br />
Shirin Hukuncin <strong>Allah</strong><br />
Yanzu da shike jinƙan <strong>Allah</strong> ya sa muna iya ganewa a fili shirin<br />
hukuncin <strong>Allah</strong> da kuma tsarin tarihi, za mu yi ƙoƙari mu bayyana ta<br />
iyaka iyawa. Tilas ne mu tabbatar da cewa duk itifaƙin da zamu yi ya zo<br />
ne daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Suna kuma muwafaka da duk abin da ake<br />
koyarwa a Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
A cikin shekara ta 11,013 BC Yesu Kristi, a matsayinsa na Ɗan<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya hallicci duniya, domin Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya gaya mana cewa Ɗan<br />
mahalicci ne, za mu iya sani cewa mutuwar Yesu a matsayin Ɗan Rago,<br />
tun daga kafuwar duniya ya faru ne kafin hallitta. Ya halicci iyayen mu na<br />
farko Adamu da Hauwa’u a cikin kamanin <strong>Allah</strong> da surarsa su yi mulkin<br />
halittu. Su cikakku ne ta kowane fanni. Su da zuriyar su a matsayin<br />
’ya’yan <strong>Allah</strong> kuma za su zauna tare da <strong>Allah</strong> har abada a cikin ɗaukaka<br />
mafi girma da farin ciki. An halicce su da jiki, da lumfashin rai, da kuma<br />
ruhu.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya fara basu dokokin da zasu yi rayuwa a cikin farin cikin<br />
mafi girma, ya kuma fara gwada amincin su ga <strong>Allah</strong>, doka ta fari da aka<br />
basu ita ce idan suka yiwa <strong>Allah</strong> rashin biyaya zasu mutu (Farawa 2:17).<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> mafi sanin abu duka ne, wanda ya san cikakken bayani<br />
game da dukan abu. <strong>Allah</strong> ya sani cewa ba da daɗewa ba, bayan halittar<br />
ɗan adam zai yi masa rashin biyayya saboda haka tun kafin lokacin <strong>Allah</strong><br />
yayi tanadi domin zuriyar ’yan adam da zasu fito daga iyayen mu na fari,<br />
Adamu da Hauwa’u, domin a cece su daga mutuwa hakkin zunubi, da<br />
dokar <strong>Allah</strong> ta tanada.<br />
A yayin gudanar da wannan shirin na ceto, za a ɗaukaka <strong>Allah</strong> da<br />
kansa yayin da za a bayyana a fili halayensa na <strong>Allah</strong>ntaka wanda basu<br />
misaltuwa. Za a bayyana su ba ga mutum kaɗai ba, amma ga dukan<br />
mulki da ikoki da ba mu san komai akai ba, amma suna nan da rai sabili<br />
da ƙoƙarin <strong>Allah</strong> duk zamanai (Afisawa 3:10-11). Mun karanta cikin<br />
IITassalonikawa 1:10 cewa:<br />
Sa’anda ya zo garin a ɗaukaka shi cikin tsarkakansa a yi al’ajibi<br />
da shi cikin dukan masu bada gaskiya cikin waccan rana (da shi<br />
ke aka gaskata shaidarmu gareku).<br />
Jim kaɗan bayan an halicce su cikkaku mutane, iyayen mu na<br />
farko, (wanda a tsasonsu dukan ’yan adam suka wanzu), suka yi wa <strong>Allah</strong><br />
rashin biyayya, saboda haka su da dukan ’yan adam, da zasu zo daga<br />
garesu, da ya kamata a yankewa hukuncin kisa nan take a matsayin<br />
biyan bashin zunubansu. Amma da yake <strong>Allah</strong> ya rigaya ya biya bashin<br />
zunuban da dama daga cikin zuriyar Adamu da Hauwa’u, mutuwa ta jiki<br />
ba zata faru nan take ba. Zasu kasance da rai har lokacin da suka haifi<br />
44
’ya’ya. Waɗannan ’ya’yan su ma zasu yi tsawon rai har su kai ga lokacin<br />
da zasu haifi ’ya’ya da sauransu. Har sai an haifi dukan waɗanda <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
zaɓa ya kuma ceto daga hukuncin mutuwa sakamakon zunubi. Da shike<br />
ba za a haifi da dama daga cikin waɗanda aka zaɓa domin a cece su<br />
daga zunubai ba sai kusan ƙarshen shekaru 13,000 bayan hallitta,<br />
duniya za ta ci gaba daga wancan lokacin.<br />
Saboda haka gaskiya ne cewa iyayenmu na farko, da kuma dukan<br />
bil’adama da suka fito daga jikunansu, sun mutu da shike ba mu da<br />
sauran rai a cikin Kristi wanda muke kira rai na ruhaniya. Kuma mun<br />
karɓi hukuncin mutuwa ta jiki lokacin da Adamu da Hauwa’u suka yi<br />
zunubi. Amma <strong>Allah</strong> ya tanada cewa mutane zasu kasance a raye suna<br />
da ruhu na wani lokaci daga lokacin ɗaukar ciki zuwa bayan shekaru 900<br />
na rayuwa ta jiki. Amma a cikin ruhaniya dukan su matattu ne. Rai cikin<br />
Kristi wanda ya zama rai na har abada yayin da aka ceci zaɓaɓɓen, baya<br />
cikin rayuwar waɗanda ba a cece su ba. Illar zunubi da ya shiga cikin<br />
’yan adam lokacin da Adamu da Hauwa’u suka yi zunubi ya bi kan duk<br />
zuriyarsu. Zunubi yana mulki a cikin jikinsu da kuma ruhaniya.<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya nace cewa ’yan adam sun mutu cikin<br />
zunubi. Shaidar wannan mutuwa ta ruhaniya shine babu mutumin da bai<br />
taɓa aikata zunubi ba sai Yesu kaɗai. (Romawa 5:12, II Korintiyawa 5:21,<br />
I Bitrus 2:22). Kowanne zunubi yana sa hukumcin mutuwa ta jiki da aka<br />
zartas a kan mai zunubi ya fita fili.<br />
Muna amfani da kalmomin nan “mutuwa ta ruhaniya” yayin da<br />
muke magana akan wanda basu da ceto; Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya ambace su<br />
da cewa sun “mutu cikin zunubi” (Afisawa 2:5, Kolosiyawa 2:13) An raba<br />
su da rai a cikin <strong>Allah</strong> ta jiki da kuma ruhaniya, wanda shine rai na<br />
ruhaniya da suke da shi daga farko kafin Adamu yayi zunubi. Ka iya<br />
tunawa duk ’yan adam daga tsatson Adamu suka fito, saboda haka<br />
lokacin da yayi zunubi, dukan mu muka yi zunubi (Korintiyawa I 15:22).<br />
Ko da shike an yanke su daga rai cikin <strong>Allah</strong>, zasu ci gaba da rayuwa ta<br />
jiki (rayuwa da sanin abinda ke faruwa kewaye da su), a cikin jiki da<br />
kuma ruhu. Rayuwa ta jiki ta kan zo ƙarshe lokacin da mutum ya mutu,<br />
kuma idan ba ya da ceto, cikin jiki da kuma ruhaniya, zai yi mutuwa ta<br />
har abada. Tilas ne a ba mutum sabon ruhu da sabon jiki kafin ya sami<br />
rai cikin Kristi ko rai na har abada.<br />
An bada wannan ran cikin Kristi ga kowane mutum da <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
zaɓa domin ya sami ceto. Ana ba da shi ga mutumin da aka zaɓa yayin<br />
da <strong>Allah</strong> ya yi amfani da Maganar <strong>Allah</strong> a rayuwar mutumin. A daidai<br />
lokacin za a maye tsohon jiki da ruhun mutumin da sabon rayayyen<br />
ruhu madauwami wanda ba zai so ya sake aikata zunubi ba (IYohanna<br />
3:9). Zai ci gaba da rayuwa a cikin mattacen jikinsa na ruhaniya amma<br />
yana da tabbacin cewa a lokacin fyaucewa, za a sake mattacen jikinsa na<br />
ruhaniya nan da nan zuwa rai na har abada a cikin jikin Kristi<br />
(Tassalonikawa I 4:13-17, Korintiyawa 15:51-52).<br />
45
Zaɓaɓɓen mutum wanda ya ɗanɗana ko kuma bai riga ya<br />
ɗanɗana albarkan tashin mattatu na ruhu ba, da waɗanda ba zaɓɓaɓu ba<br />
da suke da rai da kuma ruhu dake aiki, an koyar da su ta wurin Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki abubuwa da yawa game da halin zunubin da suke cikin da<br />
kuma game da halayen <strong>Allah</strong> na ɗaukaka. Muna zaune a duniya mai kyau<br />
wadda take cike da tsirai da dabbobi da dai sauransu. waɗanda <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
halitta ya kuma nuna girman ikon halittarsa.<br />
Bugu da ƙari, ta wurin Littafi Mai-Tsarki <strong>Allah</strong> ya ba ’yan adam<br />
dukan cikakken bayanan shirin jinƙan sa na ceton waɗanda ya zaɓa<br />
zuwa ceto. Yanzu <strong>Allah</strong> yana nuna abubuwa filla filla wanda ya bayyana<br />
shirinsa shekarun ƙarshen da ranakun ƙarshe na tarihi, domin muna<br />
rayuwa ne dab da ƙarshen zamani. A cikin littafi “Mun kusa Kai <strong>Ga</strong><br />
Ƙarshe” mun tsara bisa ga Littafi Mai-Tsarki, daidai tsarin kowane abin<br />
da zai faru a ƙarshen zamani.<br />
Mun koyi cewa taron Ikklisiya ne wakilan mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> a cikin<br />
dukan duniya na tsawon shekaru 1, 955 (AD 33 zuwa 1988 AD) daga<br />
nan kuma ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 1988, <strong>Allah</strong> ya gama da shirin sa na<br />
ceto ya kuma fara shirya Ikklisiyai da duniya domin abubuwan da zasu<br />
faru a ƙarshen zamani.<br />
A wannan rana <strong>Allah</strong> ya sa shaiɗan a cikin dukan majami’u kuma<br />
ya yarda masa ya yi mulki a cikin majami’un dukan duniya. Har wa yau,<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya yadda da majami’u game da batun ceto. Ya fara ba waɗanda<br />
suka rage a cikin majami’u ɓatar basira domin su gaskanta ƙarya (II<br />
Tassalonikawa 2:11). Bugu da ƙari, an rufewa masu bi na gaskiya baki a<br />
cikin majami’u, da shike an kore su ko kuma sun yi biyayya da dokar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> da su fito daga cikin su.<br />
Waɗannan sune waɗansu daga cikin hanyoyin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya fara<br />
amfani da su a cikin majami’u yayin da yake shirya mutane a cikin<br />
majami’u domin su karɓi hukumcin <strong>Allah</strong>. Littafi Mai-Tsarki yayi gargaɗi<br />
a cikin IBitrus 4:17 cewa “za a fara shari’a ta kan jama’ar <strong>Allah</strong>.”<br />
Haka kuma, fara daga ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 1988 an ba<br />
shaiɗan ’yanci mai -yawa domin ya taimaka wa zunubi ya yawaita ba a<br />
majami’u ba kawai amma har da sauran duniya. Mun karanta a cikin<br />
Ruya ta Yohanna 13:7 cewa:<br />
Aka yarda masa kuma shi yi yaƙi da tsarkaka, shi yi nasara da<br />
su, aka ba shi kuma hukunci bisa kowace kabila da al’umma da<br />
kowane harshe da iri.<br />
A gaskiya, ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 1988 shine mafarin wani abu<br />
mai muhimmancin da zai faru a ƙarshen zamani na tsowon shekaru 23<br />
cur, (kwanaki 8,400) , wanda zai kai ga ƙarshe ranar 21 ga watan Mayu,<br />
2011. Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya kira wannan kwanaki 8,400 lokacin “babban<br />
tsanani (Dubi shafi ....na wannan bincike).<br />
46
Waɗannan kwanaki 8,400 na babban tsanani wanda muke rayuwa a ciki,<br />
lokaci ne da <strong>Allah</strong> ya ke shirya majami’u a duk faɗin duniya da kuma<br />
duniya kanta domin ƙarshen zamani.<br />
Cikin kwanaki 2,300 na farko, (21 ga watan Mayu, 1988 zuwa<br />
Satumba 7, 1994), kusan babu wanda ya sami ceto. Amma da yake akwai<br />
zaɓaɓɓu da dama da <strong>Allah</strong> bai cecesu ba tukuna, ranar 7 ga watan<br />
Satumba, 1994, <strong>Allah</strong> ya fara wani babban shirin ceto inda zai ceci<br />
dukan zaɓaɓɓun ɗaya-ɗaya (Matta 24:22). An kawo wannan girbin masu<br />
bada gaskiyan ne gaba ɗaya daga wajen majami’u. Zai ci gaba na tsawon<br />
kwanaki 6,100 sauran kwanakin 8,400, na lokacin ƙunci, A cikin<br />
kwanakin nan 6,100 majami’u da duniya suna ƙara dulmaya cikin<br />
zunubi yayinda <strong>Allah</strong> ya ke ci gaba da shirya waɗanda ba zaɓaɓɓu ba<br />
zuwa ceto zuwa ƙarshen su.<br />
Sa’annan ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011 shirin ceton <strong>Allah</strong> ga<br />
duniya zai kawo ga ƙarshe ba shiri. Dukan waɗanda suka zama masu bi<br />
na gaskiya a cikin shekaru 13,000 da suka shige, da suka mutu za a tada<br />
jikunan su daga matattu a matsayin jikuna masu ɗaukaka na ruhaniya.<br />
Za a ɗauke su (fyaucewa) a gaban idon dukan waɗanda basu bada<br />
gaskiya ba kuma suna duniya a lokacin. Za a kuma canza dukan masu bi<br />
na gaskiya da suke da rai a lokacin a fyauce su zuwa sama su zauna<br />
tare da Kristi har abada abadin. Suma za a fyauce su a fuskar waɗanda<br />
ba su bada gaskiya ba. Haka kuma ƙasusuwa, ko kuma abinda ya rage a<br />
kabarbaru, ko cikin teku, ko ina da aka binne marasa ceto, zasu tashi (za<br />
a fid da su daga wuraren da aka binne su) za su kasance ko ina a cikin<br />
duniya suna shiri domin hallaka gaba ɗaya a ranar 21 ga watan Octoba,<br />
2011, lokacin da za a hallaka duniya baki ɗaya da wuta (|Dubi shafi na....<br />
zuwa... na wannan bincike). Banda haka kuma, hallaka gawarsu shine<br />
abin kunya na ƙarshe da zasu fuskanta a gaban <strong>Allah</strong> maɗaukaki da<br />
kuma ikoki na sama.<br />
Lamarin da duniya take ciki zai yi muni ainun fara daga ranar 21<br />
ga watan Mayu, 2011 ya kuma ci gaba na tsawon kwanaki 153. Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki yace za’a yi kuka da cizon haƙora (Matta 8:11-12; 13:42,<br />
Luka 13:28). Babu sauran wata damar ceto. Saboda haka babu jinƙai.<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya bayyana wannan lokacin filla filla (Kubawar Sharia<br />
28:16-68, Ruya ta Yohanna 9:1-2), da ya ke bayyana illar nukiliya ko<br />
kuma wani abu da ya yi daidai da abinda yake biyo bayan ɓarnar<br />
nukiliya. Ko da mene ne, za a ga mace mace ko’ina.<br />
Sa’annan rana ta ƙarshe ta duniya zata zo. Mun karanta a cikin<br />
IIBitrus 3:10...<br />
A cikinta fa sammai zasu shuɗe tare da ƙara mai girma da ƙuna<br />
mai zafi, duniya kwa da ayyukan da ke cikin ta zasu ƙone.<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya gaya mana cewa a ƙarshe za a jefa mutuwa<br />
da jahannama cikin ƙorama ta wuta (Ruya Ta Yohanna 20:14). Daɗin<br />
47
daɗawa, <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana yadda ƙarshen wannan duniya zai kasance, ya<br />
kuma nunawa ’yan adam game da madauwamiyar ɗaukakar da ta ke<br />
jiran waɗanda <strong>Allah</strong> ya ceta. A wannan lokacin kuma, ta wurin Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyayana ƙarshen mutuwa da zata afkowa kowane<br />
mutum da <strong>Allah</strong> bai yi shirin ceta ba daga mutuwar da dole zata sauko<br />
kan su domin zunubi<br />
Yayinda <strong>Allah</strong> yake koya mana a fili game da shirin ceto na <strong>Allah</strong>,<br />
mun koya daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki cewa za a iya raba mutanen duniya<br />
ƙungiya ƙungiya. Waɗannan ƙungiyoyin suna nan kamar haka:<br />
1. Waɗanda ba zaɓaɓɓu ba, wato, waɗanda ba a zaɓe su domin<br />
a cece su ba, ba kuma zasu taɓa samun ceto ba, suka mutu<br />
kafin ranar sharia.<br />
2. Waɗanda suke zaɓaɓɓu, waɗanda tilas <strong>Allah</strong> ya cece su<br />
domin an zaɓe su domin a cecesu, waɗanda suke da rai,<br />
amma har yanzu ba a cece su ba.<br />
3. Waɗanda zaɓaɓɓu ne, kuma suna da ceto kuma a yanzu<br />
haka suna da rai a duniya.<br />
4. Waɗanda ba zaɓaɓɓu ba, kuma ba su mutu ba.<br />
5. Waɗanda zaɓaɓɓu ne kuma sun mutu.<br />
Waɗanda Ba Zaɓaɓɓu Bane Waɗanda Suka Mutu Kafin Ranar Shari’a<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> bai zaɓi mutane masu ɗinbin yawa ba domin samun ceto,<br />
kafin kafawar duniya. <strong>Allah</strong> ne kaɗai ya san ko su wanene. Su ka yi<br />
rayuwa a duniyar nan na wani lokaci sa’annan suka mutu. Sun mutu ba<br />
tare da sanin cewa mutuwar su aiwatar da hukumcin kisan ne abin<br />
kunya a idon <strong>Allah</strong> da kuma mulki da ikoki ba. Duk lokacin da suka yi<br />
zunubi suna kunyatar da <strong>Allah</strong> suna kuma ƙara cusa kansu ƙarƙashin<br />
la’anar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Bugu da ƙari, lokacin da suka mutu, ya yiwu suna baƙin ciki cewa<br />
ba za su iya sake cin moriyar abubuwan jin daɗi na wannan duniya ba.<br />
Sai dai, idan suka mutu sakamakon wani haɗari ko kuma a cikin<br />
barcinsu, ba su ma ɗanɗana asararsu ba. Ba su san cewa mutuwarsu<br />
tana nufin cewa hakika bashi yiwuwa su taɓa samun gagarumin gadon<br />
da zai zama na su domin an haliccesu su zama ’ya’yan <strong>Allah</strong> ba. Da yake<br />
kowanne mutum yana cikin Adamu, iyayen mu na farko, lokacin da aka<br />
halicce shi, an halicce mu da ’yancin gadonsa na ɗan fari. Wannan<br />
’yancin haihuwar ya ƙunshi gadon rai madauwami. Amma yana da<br />
sharaɗi. Yana daidai da halin da Isuwa ya shiga. Da Isuwa bai yi zunubi<br />
ba ta wurin watsi da gadon haihuwarsa, wanda ya zama nasa kasancewa<br />
shine ɗan fari da aka haifa da ya ci gaba da zama nasa. Da Adamu da<br />
Hauwa’u ba su yi zunubi ba, da sun ci gaba da riƙe gadonsu na haihuwa<br />
har abada. Wato da ba za a taɓa fitar da su daga mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> ba. Kamar<br />
Isuwa waɗanda suka mutu ba tare da sun sami ceto ba, sun sayar da<br />
48
gadon haihuwarsu domin ƙwaryar abinci. Za mu iya duban ƙwaryar<br />
abincin nan a matsayin misalin tukwici na nan take da zunubi ke<br />
kawowa. Ya rigaya ya fara da zunubin Adamu.<br />
Saboda haka ko da shike waɗannan mutane sun mutu ba tare da<br />
sanin gagarumin bashin da suka biya sabili da zunubansu ba, bai sake<br />
gaskiyar cewa sun biya bashin ba. Wannan hukumcin shine asarar gadon<br />
haihuwarsu, wato mulkin <strong>Allah</strong>. Wannan ya nuna a fili girman jinƙan<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Sai dai, ko da shike sun mutu, kuma ba zasu ƙara sanin abinda<br />
ke faruwa ba, <strong>Allah</strong> bai gama da su ba tukuna. Za a tashi Ƙasusuwansu,<br />
ko abinda ya rage na mattatun jikunansu daga wurin da aka binne su<br />
ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011, ranar fyaucewa, wadda ta kasance ranar<br />
Shari’a ta farko. Za a watsa gawarsu kamar shara ko kuma taki a ƙasa,<br />
yadda za su kumyata ta wajen ƙazabta su da Angulaye, da karnuka, da<br />
tsutsa da sauransu zasu yi. Karon ƙarshe, za a kumyatar da su a idon<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> da mulki da kuma ikoki.<br />
Daga ƙarshe, a ranar 21 ga watan Oktoba, 2011, ranar Shari’a ta<br />
ƙarshe, za a ƙone jikunansu tare da ƙasa, da dukan duniya da wuta a<br />
hallaka su har abada.<br />
Zaɓaɓɓu Waɗanda Ba A Cece Su Ba Tukuna<br />
Akwai mutane da suke duniyar nan waɗanda aka zaɓa, amma har<br />
yanzu basu sami ceto ba. An biya bashin wannan ruƙunin mutanen<br />
domin su zaɓaɓɓu ne na <strong>Allah</strong>, Kristi shine kuma Ragon da aka yanka<br />
tun kafuwar duniya, an biya bashin zunuban wannan ruƙunin mutanen,<br />
tun kafin a haife su. Saboda haka <strong>Allah</strong> ba zai hallaka su ba. Har yanzu<br />
su mattatu ne cikin ruhaniya, amma a jiki suna da rai da ruhu dake aiki,<br />
kamar yanayin da waɗanda ba zaɓaɓɓu na <strong>Allah</strong> ba suke ciki waɗanda<br />
kuma daga ƙarshe za’a hallakasu har abada.<br />
Amma da yake an rufe zunuban dukan zaɓɓaɓu ta wurin<br />
mutuwar Yesu, dole ne <strong>Allah</strong> ya cece su (dole ya gafarta masu), kafin su<br />
mutu cikin jiki ko kuma kafin ranar fyaucewa da zata auku ranar 21 ga<br />
watan Mayu, 2011. A daidai lokacin da suka sami ceto zasu shiga<br />
ruƙunin mutanen da aka ceta, waɗanda za a fyauce zuwa wurin <strong>Allah</strong> a<br />
ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011.<br />
Waɗanda Aka Ceta Kuma Yanzu Haka Suna Nan Zaune A Wannan<br />
Duniyar<br />
Wannan ruƙunin mutane ya ci gaba da girma domin <strong>Allah</strong> yana<br />
ceton ɗumbin mutane da ba wanda zai iya ƙirgawa. An rigaya an ba su<br />
sabon ruhu rayayye, madauwami. Idan suka mutu kafin 21 ga Mayu,<br />
2011, a cikin madauwamin ransu rayayye, nan take kuma za su yi mulki<br />
a sama tare da Kristi. Ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011, mattatun<br />
49
jikunansu zasu fito daga kaburbura a matsayin madauwamin jiki na<br />
ruhaniya, za a kuma fyauce jikunansu su kasance tare da Kristi. Saboda<br />
haka duk zasu zauna cikkakun mutane cikin jiki da ruhu da zai rayu ya<br />
kuma yi mulki tare da Kristi har abada.<br />
Idan har yanzu suna da rai a ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011, nan<br />
take za a basu sabon jiki madauwami mai rai. Za a kuma fyauce su su<br />
zauna tare da Kristi har abada.<br />
Waɗanda Ba Zaɓaɓɓu Ba Da Suke Da Rai Har Ranar 21 <strong>Ga</strong> Mayu, 2011<br />
Wannan ruƙunin mutanen da ke da yawan gaske, yaji gargaɗi<br />
cewa ƙarshen duniya ya kusa. Amma ba su maida hankali a kai ba. Basu<br />
maida hankali a kai ba domin basu gaskanta cewa Littafi Mai-Tsarki<br />
Maganar <strong>Allah</strong> ba ne. Ko kuma basu kasa kunne a kan gargaɗin ba<br />
domin sun amince da koyaswar Ikklisiyarsu cewa Kristi zai zo kamar<br />
ɓarawo da dare, saboda haka ba su bukatar kula da koyarwar da suka<br />
hakikanta cewa karkatacciyar koyarwa ce game da dawowar Kristi. Ko<br />
kuma sabili da ƙaunar wannan duniya da suke yi, ba su maida hankali ga<br />
gargaɗin ba domin basu son duniyar su ta ƙare.<br />
Fiye da shekaru 1,900, Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya koya cewa Kristi zai<br />
zo kamar ɓarawo da dare, kuma bai zo ba. Saboda haka mutane da yawa<br />
suna tunani cewa ba zai zo ya kawo ƙarshen duniyan nan ba, nan da<br />
shekaru 100 ko fi. Saboda haka zasu iya tabbacin cewa za su ci gaba da<br />
jin daɗin wannan duniya duk tsawon rayuwarsu. Amma idan aka bada<br />
ainihin ranar, ranar da ta rage ’yan shekaru kaɗan kawai nan gaba,<br />
wannan ba abu mai karɓuwa ba ne gare su. Saboda haka ba su son su ji<br />
bayanin da muka samu daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
A matsayin ƙarin hukucin ga mutanen da suka ji gargaɗin amma<br />
suka ƙi biyayya da shi, wannan ruƙunin mutanen, zasu shiga da ransu<br />
watannin nan biyar matsananta da ake kira ranar sharia da zata fara da<br />
fyaucewar masu bi na gaskiya a ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011.<br />
Za su ga ana fyauce mutane yayin da aka bar su a baya. Za su yi kuka da<br />
cizon haƙoransu ga <strong>Allah</strong> a cikin fushi. Daɗin daɗawa, zasu sha azaba<br />
mai-tsanani na tsawon watanni biyar, sabili da annobar da zata fara da<br />
babbar girgizan ƙasa a rana ta farko. Idan suka mutu a cikin watannin<br />
nan biyar, ya yiwu kuma da dama su mutu, jikunansu zasu bazu a ko’ina<br />
a ƙasa. Daga ƙarshe, ranar 21 ga watan Octoba, 2011, za a ƙona dukan<br />
duniya har da ƙasa da dukan ayyukan da ke cikinta, ba zasu sake rayuwa<br />
ba.<br />
Tashin Matattun Da Ba Su Da Ceto<br />
Mun koyi cewa idan wanda ba zaɓaɓɓe ba ya mutu, ya mutu cikin<br />
jiki da kuma ruhu. Kuma ba zai sake rayuwa ba. Babu wani wuri a cikin<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki da aka bayyana cewa marasa ceto da suka mutu za su<br />
50
sake rayuwa. Amma akwai ayoyi kima da suka nuna cewa za su sake<br />
rayuwa domin su ƙara ɗanɗana fushin <strong>Allah</strong>. Mu dubi waɗannan ayoyin a<br />
hankali, za mu koyi cewa waɗannan ayoyi sun nuna mana yadda kunyar<br />
da take kan waɗanda basu da ceto zata ci gaba har zuwa rana ta ƙarshe<br />
na wannan duniyar. Mu karanta a cikin Ayyukan Manzanni 24:15 cewa:<br />
Ina da bege ga <strong>Allah</strong>, abin da waɗannan da kansu kuma suna<br />
sauraronsa, za a yi tashin mattatu na masu adalci da na marasa<br />
adalci.<br />
Mun kuma karanta a cikin Yohanna 5:28-29 cewa:<br />
Kada ku yi mamakin wannan; gama sa’a tana zuwa, inda dukan<br />
waɗanda suna cikin kaburbura za su ji muryatasa, su fito kuma;<br />
waɗanda sun yi nagarta, su fito zuwa tashi na rai, waɗanda sun<br />
yi mugunta zuwa tashi na shari’a.<br />
A Daniel 12:2 <strong>Allah</strong> yace:<br />
Da yawa kuwa daga cikin waɗanda suke barci cikin turɓayar ƙasa<br />
zasu falka, waɗansu zuwa rai, na har abada waɗansu kuma zuwa<br />
kunya da reni marar matuƙa.<br />
Waɗannan ayoyin suna magana akan mutanen da suka mutu<br />
waɗanda zasu falka, suna jin muryar <strong>Allah</strong>. Ta yaya wannan zata yiwu?<br />
Idan ba a fara rayar da ba ba yadda zai iya jin muryar <strong>Allah</strong>?<br />
Za a iya samun amsar a cikin Ezekiel 37, inda misalan biyu da<br />
harshen da aka saba magana da shi a duniya, <strong>Allah</strong> yayi Magana game<br />
da wannan tambaya. A cikin aya 4 da 5 <strong>Allah</strong> yace:<br />
Ya sake ce mani, kayi annabci a bisa waɗannan ƙasusuwa, ka ce<br />
masu, ya ku ƙasusuwa busassu, ku ji maganar Ubangiji haka nan<br />
Ubangiji Yahweh ya ce ga shi zan sa numfashi a cikinku za ku<br />
rayu.<br />
A waɗannan ayoyi <strong>Allah</strong> yana cewa kafin numfashin rai ya shiga<br />
cikin waɗannan busassun ƙassusuwan zasu iya jin Maganar Ubangiji. A<br />
cikin ruhaniya, <strong>Allah</strong> yana cewa waɗannan da ya yi shirin ceto suna kama<br />
da busassun ƙasusuwa da basu da rai. Sun mutu cikin ruhaniya ko da<br />
shike suna raye cikin jiki. Amma <strong>Allah</strong> zai iya ba waɗannan mutanen da<br />
ke mattatu ga ruhu kunnuwan ji na ruhaniya, abinda kuma yake yi yayin<br />
da ya tashe su daga matattu cikin ruhaniya zuwa rai na har abada.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> kuma ya yi magana filla filla cikin kalaman duniya inda ya<br />
ƙara cewa a cikin Ezekiel 3:12-13:<br />
51
Ka yi annabci fa, kace masu ga shi, zan buɗe kabarbarunku, ya<br />
mutane inji Ubangiji Yahweh, zan kuma kawo ku cikin ƙasar<br />
Isra’ila. Za ku sakankance kwa ni ne Ubangiji sa’anda na buɗe<br />
kabarbarunku na tsamo ku kuma daga kabarbarunku, ya<br />
mutane na.<br />
Za a iya fahimtar waɗannan ayoyin ta fannin ruhaniya, amma<br />
kuma suna koya mana a zahirin gaskiyar duniya. A lokacin fyaucewa,<br />
jikunan zaɓaɓɓu zasu ji muryarsa, su kuma fito. Za a ba jikunansu rai na<br />
har abada domin za a tada su da jiki na ruhaniya madawwami<br />
(IKorintiyawa 15:44).<br />
Amma ko da shike ɗaiɗaikun jikunan zaɓaɓɓun suna Maganar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> kafin a basu numfashi (Ezekiel 37:4-5), ƙasusuwa ko kuma gangan<br />
jikin waɗanda basu da ceto, yayin da suke a mace. Za su iya jin Maganar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>. Abin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya faɗa a cikin Ezekiel 37, shine zai iya umurtar<br />
komi ya yi biyayya da nufinsa yadda ya ga dama. Ka tuna misali Markus<br />
4:39 da 41 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Ya farkar ya tsauta ma, iska ya ce ma teku, ka natsu, kayi shiru,<br />
iska ta kwanta, babbar natsuwa ta samu,... suka ji tsoro ƙwarai,<br />
suka ce ma junansu, wanene wannan fa wanda har iska da teku<br />
suna biyayya da shi?<br />
In har iska da raƙuman ruwa zasu yi biyayya da umurnin Yesu,<br />
dole ne su kasance a falke domin su ji muryar sa. Haka nan za a tada<br />
mattatun ƙasusuwan da jikunan waɗanda basu da ceto, su ji muryar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ba tare da suna raye zahiri ba. Abin da zai faru ke nan lokacin da<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> zai fitar da jikunan waɗanda suka mutu ba tare da sun sami ceto<br />
ba, daga kabari a lokacin da ranar shari’a ta fara.<br />
Ya kamata su san yadda <strong>Allah</strong> ya rubuta waɗannan ayoyin guda<br />
uku a hankali waɗanda suka yi magana game da tashin mattatu. A<br />
Ayyukan mazanni 24:15 <strong>Allah</strong> ya ce akwai tashin mattatu na marasa<br />
adalci. Sai ka ce tashin mattatu na marasa ceto yana kama da tashin<br />
mattatu na masu bada gaskiya, sai dai a cikin Yohanna 5:29, <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
bayyana cewa za a tashi marasa ceto zuwa hallaka. kalmar nan “Hallaka”<br />
tana nuna wani ɓangare na hukucin da marasa ceto suke sha sabili da<br />
zunubansu. Wanne fannin hukuncin ne <strong>Allah</strong> yake magana a kai?<br />
Aya ta uku, Daniel 12:2, ta nuna mana abin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya ke da shi<br />
a zuciya. Tashin mattatu ne zuwa kunya. Wannan zai faru ne lokacin da<br />
aka tada jikunan su da ƙasussuwan su daga kabarbaru aka sake jefad da<br />
su ko ina a ƙasa, domin a kunyatar da su a idon waɗanda suke raye a<br />
farkon ranar shari’a, da kuma gaban <strong>Allah</strong> da gaban ikokin a sammai.<br />
An bayyana wannan abin baƙin ciki a cikin Irmiya 7:33 zuwa 8:21 inda<br />
muka karanta cewa:<br />
52
“<strong>Ga</strong>wayen mutanen nan za su zama naman tsuntsayen sama, da<br />
bisashen ƙasa, ba kuwa wanda za ya kore su ba. Sa’annan zan sa<br />
muryar wasa da dariya, da muryar farin ciki da muryar ango da<br />
muryar amarya, kuma su ƙare a biranen Yahuda da hanyoyin<br />
Urushalima kuma gama ƙasar za ta zama kango. A loton nan, in<br />
ji Ubangiji za su ɗauko ƙasusuwan sarakunan Yahuda da na<br />
hakimai da na firistoci da na annabawa da na manzannin<br />
Urushalima daga cikin kabarburan su za a shinfiɗe su a rana da<br />
farin wata, da dukan rundunar sama waɗanda suka ƙamnace su,<br />
suka bauta masu kuma suka bi su, suka biɗe su, suka yi masu<br />
sujada kuma: ba za a tattara su ba, ba kuwa za a bizne su ba, za<br />
su zama taki a bisa fuskar ƙasa.<br />
A Nahum 3:5-6 <strong>Allah</strong> yace:<br />
“<strong>Ga</strong> shi ina gaba da ke inji Ubangiji mai runduna, zan kuwa buɗe<br />
asirinki a gaban fuskar ki; zan nuna ma al’ummai tsiraicin ki<br />
kunyarki, kuma zan bayyana ga mulkoki. Zan zuba maki ƙazanta<br />
mai ban ƙyama in maishe ki abu mummuna, in kafa ki abin kallo.<br />
Masu Bi Suna Shari’anta Marasa Ceto<br />
A farkon ranar sharia, 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011, lokacin da za a<br />
ga ana fyauce jikunan mattatu na Nineba a sararin sama (fyaucewa) zuwa<br />
cikin gajimarai domin su kasance tare da Kristi, zai kasance shari’a da<br />
hukumci ga waɗanda aka bari a baya. Mutanen Nineba sun gane da<br />
muguntarsu, suka ƙasƙantar da kansu suka tuba, suka ta da muryar su<br />
ga <strong>Allah</strong> domin yayi masu jinƙai, suna begen cewa wata kila <strong>Allah</strong> ba zai<br />
hallaka su ba. Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya shaida mana cewa <strong>Allah</strong> a cikin<br />
jinƙansa, ya cece su.<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>skiyar cewa sababbin jikunan mutanen Nineba da aka fyauce,<br />
ya jaddada zunuban waɗanda aka bari a baya. Wannan kashewar zata<br />
faru ga waɗanda suka gaskanta an cece su, amma madogarar su tana<br />
kan Ikklisiyarsu ko baftismar su, da dai sauransu. Ta haka zasu karɓi<br />
hukunci mai tsanani fiye da waɗanda basu san Littafi Mai-Tsarki ba.<br />
Fyaucewar mutanen Nineba wanda zai nuna a fili cewa an cece su,<br />
babbar shaida ce cewa waɗanda aka bari a baya basu da ceto kuma babu<br />
shakka, zasu kasance ƙarƙashin fushin <strong>Allah</strong>. Wannan ya bayyana ayoyi<br />
kamar waɗannan:.<br />
Matta 12:41 Nawiyawa zasu tashi tsaye a ranar shari’a tare da<br />
wannan tsarai, za su kuwa kashe ta: gama su suka tuba da<br />
wa’azin Yunana ga kuwa wanda ya fi Yunana girma a nan.<br />
53
Ruya ta Yohanna 2:26: Wanda ya yi nasara kuma, wanda ya<br />
kiyaye ayyuka na har matuƙa, a gare shi zani bada iko bisa<br />
al’ummai.<br />
Ruya ta Yohanna 3:9: <strong>Ga</strong> shi na bayas daga cikin majami’ar<br />
shaitan, waɗanda suke ce da kansu Yahudawa, ba kuwa haka<br />
suke ba, amma suna ƙarya; ga shi zan sa su su zo su yi sujada a<br />
gaban sawayenka, su sani kuma na ƙamnace ka.<br />
Korintiyawa I 6:2-3: Ko kuwa ba ku sani ba tsarkaka za su yi ma<br />
duniya sharia? Idan fa kuke yi ma duniya shari’a ba ku isa ku<br />
shari’anta ƙanƙananan al’amura ba? Ba ku sani ba mu za mu yi<br />
ma mala’iku shari’a, balle fa al’amuran wannan zamani.<br />
An sake mana tuni a IBitrus 2:12 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Kuna al’amura na dacewa (hali) wurin al’ummai, domin yayin da<br />
suke kushe ku kamar ma’aikatan mugunta, ta wurin nagargarun<br />
ayyukan da suke dubawa su ɗaukaka <strong>Allah</strong> cikin ranar ziyara.<br />
A cikin wannan bayanin, maganar nan ‘‘ɗaukaka <strong>Allah</strong> cikin ranar<br />
ziyara’’ ya shafi waɗanda za a hukunta sabili da zunubansu, kamar<br />
yadda aka gaya wa Acan ya ɗaukaka <strong>Allah</strong>, yayinda ake shirin kashe shi<br />
domin zunubansa (Joshua 7:18-26).<br />
Ta haka zamu fahimci cewa lokaci da waɗanda basu da ceto<br />
suka gane cewa gaskiya ne mutum ya sami ceto, (kamar yadda<br />
fyaucewar mutumin ta nuna) zai kawo shari’a da hukucin akan waɗanda<br />
suke zaton cewa suna da ceto, amma yanzu suka sani cewa ba su da<br />
ceto domin an barsu a baya a lokacin fyaucewa. Masu bi na gaskiya da<br />
aka fyauce sun hukunta su.<br />
Abinda zai faru ke nan a duk faɗin duniya ranar 21 ga watan<br />
Mayu, 2011, lokacin da za a fyauce jikunan waɗanda suka mutu, tare da<br />
duka masu bi na gaskiya da suke raye, su kasance tare da Kristi. Wannan<br />
zata zama babban hukunci a kan duniya musamman a kan waɗanda<br />
suke cikin majami’u a duk faɗin duniya, waɗanda kabilun nan 12 na<br />
Isra’ila suka wakilta a zamanin Ikklisiya. (Ruya ta Yohanna 7:4-8, Matta<br />
19:28). Zai zama shaida cewa dukan waɗanda aka bari a baya suna<br />
ƙalƙashin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Cikar (lamba 12) na dukan masu bi waɗanda suke mulki tare da<br />
Kristi, zasu yi wa duniya da kuma Ikkilisiya sharia (kabilu 12, dubi Matta<br />
19:28) da shike suna tare da Kristi har abada, kuma an hallaka duniya da<br />
majami’u cikin ƙorama ta wuta har abada.<br />
Yaƙin Armagaddon<br />
54
Yaƙin Armagaddon da aka yi Magana a kai cikin Ruya ta Yohanna<br />
shine yanzu muke bayani a kai. Mayaƙan masu bi na gaskiya da ke<br />
zaune lafiya a lokacin tare da Kristi, ba ya shiga yaƙi na zahiri da<br />
waɗanda basu da ceto. Sai dai za a ga gagarumar shaidar nan cewa<br />
hakika sun sami ceto, a dukan duniya lokacin fyaucewa. Wannan zai<br />
zama babbar shari’a, da hukunci a kan mayaƙan waɗanda ba su da ceto<br />
da aka bari a baya a lokacin fyaucewa.<br />
Maganar <strong>Allah</strong> kanta tana kawo hukunci a kan mai zunubi saboda<br />
haka, kuma shaidar ceto a rayuwar waɗanda aka fyauce shine hukunci a<br />
kan waɗanda basu da ceto. Mun karanta a cikin Ibraniyawa 11:7 cewa:.<br />
Ta wurin bangaskiya Nuhu da aka faɗakad da shi a kan al’amuran<br />
da ba a gani ba tukuna, domin tsoro mai ibada sai ya shirya jirgi<br />
domin ceton gidansa ta wurin wannan fa ya kada duniya, ya<br />
zama magajin adalci wanda ke bisa ga bangaskiya.<br />
Da shike jirgin ya kare Nuhu daga hallaka lokacin da ruwan<br />
Ɗufana ya sauko hukunci ne akan marasa ceto waɗanda suka hallaka a<br />
cikin ruwa kamar yadda Maganar <strong>Allah</strong> da kanta ta kawo hukunci a kan<br />
waɗanda suka saɓa mata.<br />
Ta yaya mayaƙan marasa ceto zasu yi yaƙin Armageddon? <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ya ce a Joel 3:9-16:<br />
Ku yi shelar wannan a wurin al’ummai ku yi shirin yaƙi ku kutta<br />
jarumawa bari dukan mayaƙa su guso, su hau; ku bubbuga<br />
garmunan ku a yi takubba da su lauzunan ku kuma ku yi masu<br />
da su; bari rarrauna shi ce, ina da ƙarfi. Ku gaggauta, ku zo<br />
dukan ku, al’ummai na kewaye ku tattaru; ya Ubangiji, ka sa<br />
ƙarfafan ka su zo wurin. Bari al’umma su tashi tsaye, su hau<br />
wurin kwarin Jehoshaphat gama can zan zamna garin yin shari’a<br />
bisa dukan al’ummai na kewaye. Ku sa lauje, gama amfanin kaka<br />
ya nuna ku zo ku taka, gama wurin matsewar ruwan anab ya<br />
cika, randuna suna zuba gama muguntar su, tana da girma.<br />
Babban taro, taron mai yawa cikin kwarin yankan shari’a gama<br />
ranar Ubangiji ta kusa cikin kwari na yankan sharia. Rana da<br />
wata sun dufunta, tamrari suna jan haskensu. Ubangiji za ya yi<br />
ruri daga sihiyona, ya furtad da muryar sa daga sihiyona, ya<br />
furtad da muryar sa daga Urushalima, Sammai da duniya zasu yi<br />
rawa; amma Ubangiji za ya zama mataka ga mutanensa,<br />
ƙaƙƙarfan wuri kuma ga yaƙin Isra’ila.<br />
Kamar budurwai goma da aka yi maganarsu a Matta 25, waɗanda<br />
suka falka lokacin da Angon (Kristi) ya zo, haka kuma a farkon ranar<br />
shari’a, marasa ceto za su yi shiri su yi yaƙi da masu ceto. Yaƙinsu na<br />
55
abban takaici ne matsanancin fushi yayin da suke yi wa <strong>Allah</strong> kuka da<br />
cizon haƙoran su ga <strong>Allah</strong> domin barin su a baya.<br />
Matta 7:22-23: A cikin wannan rana mutane da yawa za su ce<br />
mani, Ubangiji, Ubangiji ba mu yi annabci da sunanka ba, da<br />
sunanka kuma muna fitar da aljanu, da sunanka kuma muka yi<br />
ayyuka da yawa masu iko sa’annan za su furta masu, ban taɓa<br />
saninku ba daɗai, rabu da ni ku masu aikata mugunta.<br />
Matta 8:11-12: kuma ina ce maku, mutane da yawa daga gabas<br />
da yamma zasu zo, su zamna tare da Ibrahim, da Ishaku da<br />
Yakub, cikin mulkin sammai amma za a fitar da ’ya’yan mulki<br />
cikin baƙin duhu, can za a yi kuka da tamnar haƙora.<br />
Matta 13:49-50: Hakanan kuma za ya zama cikin matuƙar<br />
zamani malai’ku za su fito, su rarraba miyagu daga cikin masu<br />
adalci, su jefa su cikin ɓuyar wuta, can za a yi kuka da cizon<br />
haƙora.<br />
Luka 13:26-28: Sa’annan za ku yi ta cewa, muka ci muka sha<br />
wurinku, har ka yi koyaswa a cikin hanyoyinmu, shi ma za ya ce<br />
ina faɗa maku dani ban san inda kuka fito ba, ku rabu da ni<br />
dukan ku da ku ke masu aikata mugunta. Can za’a yi kuka da<br />
cizon haƙora, lokacin da kun ga Ibrahim da Ishaku da Yakub da<br />
dukan annabawa cikin mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> ku da kanku kuwa na fitar da<br />
ku waje.<br />
Ruya ta Yohanna 16:10-11: Na biyar kuma ya zubas da nasa<br />
kasko bisa kursiyin bisani, mulkinsa kuwa ya duhunta, suka cije<br />
harsunansu domin azaba. Kuma suka saɓa <strong>Allah</strong> na sama<br />
saboda azabarsu da gyambunansu, ba su kwa tuba da ayyukansu<br />
ba.<br />
A ruya ta Yohanna 17:14 <strong>Allah</strong> ya yi Magana game da wannan<br />
yaƙi, muka kuma karanta cewa:<br />
Waɗannan kuma za su yi gaba da Ɗan Rago, Dan Rago kuma za<br />
ya ci su gama shine Ubangijin iyayengiji, da Sarkin Sarakuna, su<br />
kuma waɗanda ke tare da shi kirayayyu, zaɓaɓɓu, masu aminci<br />
za su yi nasara.<br />
An yi bayanin ƙarshen yaƙi, alal misali cikin Ruya ta Yohanna<br />
19:19-21<br />
56
Na ga bisan kuma da sarakuna na duniya, da rundunan yaƙinsu,<br />
a tattare domin su yi yaƙi da wanda yake zamne bisa dokin, da<br />
rundunansa kuma, aka kama bisan, tare da shi kuma mai ƙaryan<br />
annabci, wanda ya kan aikata alamu a gabansa, irin da ya kan<br />
ruɗe masu karɓan shaidar bisan da waɗanda ke sujada ga<br />
gunkinsa aka jefa su biyu da rai cikin ƙorama ta wuta mai-ci da<br />
kibiritu aka kashe sauran da takobi na wanda ya ke fitowa daga<br />
bakinsa ke nan. Dukan tsuntsaye fa suka ƙoshi da namansu.<br />
Mun koya da cewa ƙarshen yaƙin zai zama lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> zai<br />
hallaka dukan duniya.<br />
Takaitawa<br />
Yanzu za mu takaita abinda muka koya game da shirin shari’a na <strong>Allah</strong><br />
da yadda yake da dangataka da abubuwan da zasu faru na ƙarshen<br />
zamani na wannan duniyar<br />
1. Ra’ayin nan irin na al’ada da ke koyar da cewa ko wani marar<br />
ceto zai tsaya a zahiri gaban Kristi a matsayin mai-shari’a, a<br />
zartar da cewa shi mai laifi ne, a kuma yanke mashi<br />
hukumcin shan baƙar azaba har abada a wani wurin da ake<br />
kira jahanama, yana da rauni.<br />
2. Zamanin Ikklisiya ya ƙare ranar 21 ga Mayu,1988. Lokaci na<br />
gaba wanda yake kwanaki 8,400 daidai zai ƙare ranar 21 ga<br />
Mayu, 2011. Ana kiransa lokacin tsanani.<br />
3. An raba wannan lokaci na babban tsanani kashi biyu. Kashi<br />
na farko ya fara ne daga 21 ga Mayu, 1988 zuwa 7 ga<br />
Satumba, 1994. A wannan lokaci kusan babu wanda ya sami<br />
ceto a duniya. Kashi na biyu kwanaki 6,100 ne kuma zai fara<br />
daga 7 ga Satumba, 1994 zuwa 21 Mayu, 2011. A wannan<br />
lokacin babu wanda zai sami ceto a cikin majami’u amma a<br />
waje, ɗumbin jama’a mai girma suna samun ceto. Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki ya jaddada cewa akwai da yawa da zasu sami ceto,<br />
waɗanda suke da alaƙa da Isma’il, ɗan Ibrahim. Bugu da ƙari,<br />
ya jadada cewa da dama daga cikin waɗanda daga ƙarshe ne<br />
suka sami fahimtar Littafi Mai-Tsarki, za su riƙa zuwa cikin<br />
mulkin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
4. Duk kwanaki 8,400 na wannan lokaci na babban tsanani,<br />
lokaci ne da <strong>Allah</strong> zai raba masu bi na gaskiya (zaɓaɓaɓu)<br />
daga waɗanda suke cewa su masu bi ne, amma ba haka ba.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> yana rarrabewa ne ta wurin shirya waɗansu gwaje<br />
gwaje, kamar yadda suke a cikin wannan tsarin.<br />
a) Kowacce kalma daga ƙarshen da aka rubuta Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki daga bakin <strong>Allah</strong> ne.<br />
57
) Kowacce kalma a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> ce,<br />
kuma yana da iko daidai da <strong>Allah</strong> kansa.<br />
c) Ba da gaskiya aiki ne da muke yi, saboda haka ba wanda<br />
zai bada gaskiya ta wannan hanya da cewa zai sami ceto.<br />
Kristi ya kammala dukan aikin da mutum yake bukata<br />
domin ya sami ceto da daɗewa kafin a haifi mutumin..<br />
d) Ko da shike an kai kimanin shekaru 1,900 da rubuta<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki, gama shi ba a ƙara waɗansu kalmomi a<br />
kai. Ruhu Mai-Tsarki yana ƙara bayyana waɗansu<br />
sababbin gaskiya masu girma a zamaninmu da muke<br />
kusa da ƙarshen zamani.<br />
e) Zamanin Ikklisiya ya shuɗe, <strong>Allah</strong> kuma ya umurci mutane<br />
su bar majami’u. Shaiɗan yana mulki a can, kuma <strong>Allah</strong><br />
baya ceton mutane a cikin majami’u.<br />
F) Yanzu Kristi ya bayyana cewa zai zo kamar ɓarawo da<br />
dare.<br />
g) <strong>Allah</strong> ya ba masu bi na gaskiya ainihin rana, da wata da<br />
shekara da zai dawo domin faɗakar da duniya.<br />
h) <strong>Allah</strong> ya ba masu bi na gaskiya sababbin bayanai daga<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki game da shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
i) <strong>Allah</strong> yana ba duniya baki ɗaya ainihin lokacin ƙarshen<br />
duniya domin su sami damar tuba su yi kuka ga <strong>Allah</strong><br />
domin neman jinƙai kamar yadda mutanen Nineveh suka<br />
yi lokacin da Yunana ya faɗakar da su game da hukunci<br />
mai zuwa. Waɗanda suke masu bi na gaskiya suna<br />
damuwa da abin da Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya ke koyarwa. Suna<br />
kuma ɗaukar shi a matsayin iyakacin ikon su. Za su duba<br />
waɗannan koyaswar a hankali su kuma gaskanta da su.<br />
Waɗanda kuma suka dogara ga majami’un su ko kuma<br />
shaidar bangaskiyar majami’unsu, ko kuma tunanin<br />
kansu, waɗannan koyaswar babban gwaji ne. Waɗanda<br />
ba zaɓaɓɓu bane zuwa ga ceto za su sami babbar matsala<br />
da su.<br />
5. Babban tsananin zai kawo ga ƙarshe ranar 21 ga watan<br />
Mayu, 2011 wanda kuma shine ranar da hukuncin da ake<br />
kira “Ranar Ubangiji” zai faru. Ranar Hukunci zata ci gaba na<br />
tsawon kwanaki 153, har zuwa 21 ga watan Octoba, 2011<br />
lokacin da duniya zata ƙare.<br />
6. Shirin ceto na <strong>Allah</strong> zai kawo ga ƙarshe ranar 21 ga watan<br />
Mayu, 2011. A wannan ranar ne ɗauka zuwa sama<br />
(fyaucewa) na dukan zaɓaɓɓu (cetattu na gaskiya) zata faru.<br />
Za a tada jikunan waɗanda aka ceta zuwa jiki na ruhaniya<br />
mai daraja. Nan da nan masu bi kuma da suke da rai a ranar<br />
za su karɓi sabon jikin na ruhaniya, nan take, za a kuma<br />
fyauce su zuwa sama su zauna tare da Kristi har abada.<br />
58
7. Kusan mutane biliyan bakwai ne zasu kasance a duniya a<br />
lokacin zasu kuma shaida fyaucewar masu bi na gaskiya. Za<br />
a raba waɗanda aka bari a baya ruƙuni biyu. Kimanin kashi<br />
ɗaya bisa ukunsu ko kuma biliyan biyu daga cikinsu, zasu<br />
kasance ’yan Ikkilisiya ne. Suna da ɗan sanin gaskiyar Littafi<br />
Mai-Tsarki sun gaskanta cewa su masu bi ne. Sauran kashin<br />
zai ƙunshi sauran mutanen duniya da aka bari a baya.<br />
8. Bayan wannan ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011 ranar nan maiban<br />
tsoro, ranakun da zasu biyo baya zasu kasance ne kamar<br />
sauran ranaku a duk faɗin duniya za a ci gaba da harkokin<br />
yau da kullum kamar yadda aka saba.<br />
9. Sai dai a wannan ranar, za a yi babbar girgizar ƙasa yadda a<br />
duk faɗin duniya, kabarbura da dukan maƙabartu zasu<br />
buɗe. Jikunan mutanen da aka binne a wurin kuma za su<br />
warwatsu a ƙasa. (sai dai jikuna masu bi na gaskiya domin,<br />
za a sake jikunansu zuwa jiki mai daraja da za a fyauce).<br />
10. Wannan girgizar ƙasar zata yi ɓarnar gaske a dukan duniya<br />
wanda zai haddasa mahaukaciyar guguwa mai tafe da ruwa<br />
ta tsunami, da zai lalata hanyoyin ruwa da na makamashi da<br />
sauransu. Don haka za a yi alobai masu tsanani.<br />
11. Wannan lokacin zai zama lokacin baƙin cikin gaske ga ’yan<br />
Ikkilisiya. Sun yi tsammani cewa sune za a fyauce. Sai<br />
kwatsam, suka gane cewa a bar su a baya suna kuma<br />
ƙarƙashin cikakken fushin <strong>Allah</strong>. Daga nan zasu gane cewa<br />
ba za su ji daɗin ci gaba da zama a duniyar nan ba. Abu mafi<br />
muni kuma shine zasu sani cewa basu da rai madawami tare<br />
da kiristi da kuma zama magadan sabuwar sama da sabuwar<br />
duniya. Banda haka kuma, zasu kasance a cikin kunya mai<br />
girma a idon wanɗanda ba su san komi ba game da<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki, amma yanzu suka ga cewa addininsu na<br />
kirista ƙarya ne da na riya. Fiye da haka, zasu sha babbar<br />
kunya a gaban <strong>Allah</strong> da mulkoki da ikokin na sama. A gaban<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> mutuwarsu zata kasance hukumcin kisa mai ban kunya<br />
domin suna ƙalƙashin la’anar <strong>Allah</strong>. Zasu kuma sha tsanani<br />
na jiki sakamakon annobar da zata faru a dukan duniya.<br />
Dukansu zasu mutu (za a yi masu kisan wulakanci a<br />
gaban <strong>Allah</strong>). Suma zasu mutu a ranar ko kuma kafin rana ta<br />
ƙarshe 21 ga watan Octoba, 2011.<br />
12. Sauran ruƙunin mutanen kuma waɗanda basu taɓa cewa su<br />
masu bi bane, waɗanda kuma aka barsu a baya lokacin da<br />
aka fyauce masu bi na gaskiya, zasu yi baƙin cikin sanin<br />
cewa an katse masu hanzari a irin rayuwar farin ciki da begen<br />
irin rayuwar da suke yi a nan duniya. Suma zasu jimre<br />
babbar azaba ta jiki wanda zata faru ta dalilin annobar da<br />
suke jimrewa. Suma zasu kunyata a gaban <strong>Allah</strong> da<br />
59
mulkoki da ikoki na samaniya. Suma zasu mutu, ranar ko<br />
kuma kafin ranar ƙarshe, 21 ga watan Octoba, 2011.<br />
Mutuwar su ma zata zama hukumcin kisa na wulakanci da<br />
kunya a idon <strong>Allah</strong> da mulkoki da ikokin samaniya.<br />
13. A wannan lokaci na fyaucewa, dukan kaburbura zasu buɗe<br />
dukan gawawaki da ƙasusuwa da toka da ƙura da dukan<br />
abinda ya rage na mutanen dake cikinsu, waɗanda kuma ba<br />
a fyauce ba, za a warwatsa kamar taki a duniya. Angulaye, da<br />
karnuka da tsutsotsi za su ci jikunansu. Waɗannan mutanen<br />
a lokacin mutuwar su, basu san nauyin bashin da suka biya a<br />
kan zunubansu ba. An binne da dama daga cikinsu cikin<br />
karamci da girmamawa, amma a gaban <strong>Allah</strong> mutuwar su<br />
abin kunya ce. Yawancinsu sun gane cewa mutuwarsu zata<br />
hana su murna da bege na wannan rayuwa, amma babu<br />
wanda ya san girman hukunci da zasu biya domin rasa gadon<br />
haihuwarsu na ɗan fari da gadon rai na har abada da sabuwar<br />
sama da sabuwar duniya.<br />
14. Ta wurin ya da jikunansu daga kaburbura, wata kunya ce<br />
kuma da dole waɗannan mutanen zasu jimre, ko da shike da<br />
dama daga cikinsu sun mutu da daɗewa ba tare da sun sani<br />
ba, <strong>Allah</strong> ya jaddada kunyar zunubi ta wurin buɗe kaburbura<br />
na waɗannan mutanen domin a ƙazanta gawarsu. An<br />
kumyatar da gawawakinsu an kunyatar da su a gaban <strong>Allah</strong><br />
da gaban mulki da ikoki na sammai da gaban waɗanda aka<br />
bari a baya waɗanda zasu ɗanɗana ranar shari’a. Kumyar da<br />
zasu sha a gaban <strong>Allah</strong> da gaban halittun sammai zata<br />
danganta ga irin sanin da suke da shi na dokar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
15. A ƙarshen kwanaki 153 na baƙar azabar da ake kira ranar<br />
shari’a (21 ga watan Mayu, 2011 zuwa 21 ga Octoba, 2011)<br />
ƙarshen duniyan zai zo. Duniya da dukan ayyukan ta zasu<br />
ƙone, za a hallaka duniya ma baki ɗaya. Ba za a sake tunawa<br />
da shekaru 13,023 na tarihin duniya da dukan abinda ya faru<br />
a cikinta ba.<br />
16. Masu bi na gaskiya, da za’a fyauce su zasu rayu har abada a<br />
cikin farin ciki da murna mai girma a matsayin amaryar Kristi<br />
wanda zasu yi mulki tare da shi na har abada.<br />
17. Hanyar da <strong>Allah</strong> ya saba sauko da hukunci ya kuma sa maizunubi<br />
ya jimre hukuncin zunubi kamar yadda aka bayyana a<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki, ita ce dokar <strong>Allah</strong>. Amma <strong>Allah</strong> ya yi amfani<br />
da rayuwar masu bi na gaskiya ya zama hukunci ga masu<br />
zunubi. Wannan zai zama gaskiya a ranar fyaucewa. Duk<br />
masu bi da aka fyauce a idon ’yan Ikklisiya waɗanda aka bari<br />
zai zama babbar shaida cewa Maganar <strong>Allah</strong> kamar yadda<br />
waɗanda aka fyauce suke bi, gaskiya ce kuma abin amincewa.<br />
60
Zata zama abin nuni a fili da kuma shaida cewa ’yan Ikkilisiya<br />
da sauran da aka bari a baya, basu yi biyayya da Maganar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ba.<br />
Irin fahimtar shirin shari’ar <strong>Allah</strong> kamar yadda aka saba bisa<br />
al’ada, wanda yake koyas da cewa masu zunubi zasu kasance a wani<br />
wuri da ake kira, jahannama, suna wahala mai tsanani ya saɓawa<br />
koyarwar Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
Kowanne Ido Zai <strong>Ga</strong>nshi<br />
Kimanin shekaru 2,000 da suka wuce Ubangijinmu Yesu Kristi da kansa<br />
ya zo duniyar nan. Ya zo a cikin jiki a matsayin Ɗan <strong>Allah</strong> da kuma Ɗan<br />
Mutum. Dubban mutane a ƙasar Isra’ila sun sami damar ganinsa a cikin<br />
shekarun nan kusan 40. Daga nan ya koma sama amma yayi alkawari zai<br />
sake dawowa. A wannan lokacin ya koma sama, mala’iku biyu suka gaya<br />
wa manzani kamar yadda muka karanta a cikin Ayyukan Manzani 1:11:<br />
...Ku mazajen <strong>Ga</strong>lili don me kuke tsaye kuna duba zuwa sama,<br />
wannan Yesu wanda aka ɗauke shi daga wurinku aka karɓe shi<br />
sama, kamar yadda kuka ga tafiyatasa zuwa cikin sama, haka nan<br />
zashi dawo.<br />
Dawowa “Haka nan” magana ce mai faɗi. Zai iya nufin zai sake<br />
dawowa kamar yadda ya tafi sama. Lokacin da ya zo da farko. Ya zo a<br />
matsayin Ɗan <strong>Allah</strong>, da kuma Ɗan mutum. “Haka nan kuma” na iya<br />
zama, misali, cewa zai sake dawowa a matsayin ɗan <strong>Allah</strong> amma cikin<br />
babbar ɗaukaka. Tilas ne mu bincike Littafi Mai-Tsarki mu ƙara koya<br />
game da ranar nan mai- ban tsoro. Dadowar Ubangiji Yesu Kristi ta<br />
biyu.<br />
Mun rigaya mun koya cewa tilas ne lokacin dawowar Yesu Kristi<br />
ta biyu, ya zo daidai da lokacin fyaucewa, wadda ta zo daidai da rana ta<br />
fari na kwanaki 153 na ranar shari’ar. Ranar ita ce 21 ga watan Mayu,<br />
2011. A wannan ranar, kabarbura za su buɗe, za a kuma tashi dukan<br />
gawawakin waɗanda cikin jikunan ruhaniya na ɗaukaka. Banda haka<br />
kuma za a watsar da gawarwakin da ƙasusuwa da sauransu na dukan<br />
waɗanda basu da ceto a ƙasa a matsayin juji. Za a canza jikunan<br />
waɗanda har yanzu suke da rai, kuma masu bi ne na gaskiya nan da nan<br />
zuwa jikuna na samaniya a kuma fyauce su a sararin samaniya a fuskar<br />
waɗanda aka barsu a baya. Hakika kusan mutane biliyan 61/2 waɗanda<br />
aka bari a baya, zasu san cewa Yesu ya zo, kuma zamu iya tabbatar da<br />
cewa lokacin fyaucewar kowa zai ga Yesu a lokacin dawowarshi ta biyu.<br />
Ta haka, zamu tabbatar da cewa zuwa dawowar Kristi, lokacin da<br />
kowanne ido zai gan shi, yayi daidai da fyaucewar. Dalili ke nan da ya sa<br />
zai zo tare da “gajimare” (Ruya ta Yohanna 1:7) tare da gajimare yana<br />
61
nuna cewa ya zo ne domin ya yi hukunci. Ka tuna, ranar fyaucewar ita ce<br />
kuma rana ta fari ta kwanaki 153 na ranar shari’a.<br />
Sai dai, babu wani wuri a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki da ya koyar da<br />
cewa a ranar fyaucewa, marasa ceto a duniya zasu ga Yesu ido da ido<br />
zahiri. Duk da haka Ruya ta Yohanna 1:7 ya ce “Kowane ido kuma za ya<br />
gan shi”.<br />
An warware wannan matalar misali a Yohanna 1:51 inda muka<br />
karanta cewa Yesu gaya wa:<br />
Yace masa kuma, hakika, hakika ina ce maku zaku ga sama a<br />
buɗe mala’ikun <strong>Allah</strong> kuma suna hawa suna sabka bisa Ɗan<br />
Mutum.<br />
Mun karanta a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki cewa Natanayilu ya ga<br />
sama ta buɗe mala’iku kuma suna hawa suna sauka daga sama zuwa<br />
wurin Yesu da ido ƙuru ƙuru? Hakika Littafi Mai-Tsarki bai faɗi wani abu<br />
kamar haka ba. Amma idan muka tuna cewa za a iya fassara kalmar nan<br />
“mala’ika” da “manzo” kuma duk mai bi na gaskiya manzo ne na<br />
“Bishara”, da haka mun san abinda ya kamata Natanayilu ya gani.<br />
Yayinda mutane suka sami ceto, an sa su hau cikin samaniya ta fuskar<br />
ruhaniya cikin Kristi Yesu (Afisawa 2:6). Watau a lokacin da muka sami<br />
ceto, mu na sama tare da Kristi cikin ruhaniya domin an bamu sababbin<br />
jikuna na fyaucewa. Nan take zamu shiga sama domin abinda Yesu yayi<br />
domin mu. Saboda haka tilas ne mu shiga aiki a duniyar nan mu zama<br />
wakilan Kristi a nan duniya.<br />
Watau, Yesu yana gaya wa Natanayilu cewa za ya ga mutane suna<br />
samun ceto, kuma Kristi zai yi amfani da su domin shaida Bishara. Mun<br />
ga wannan ra’ayin na ganin Kiristi nan gaba ta wajen zama shaidun<br />
abinda Kristi yake yi yanzu, a cikin abinda Almasihu ya gaya wa mugun<br />
babban Limamin nan, Kefas a Matta 26:63-64, inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Amma Yesu yayi shiru, babban malami fa ya ce masa, na gama ka<br />
da <strong>Allah</strong> mai rai, ka faɗa mana, ko kai Kristi ne, Ɗan <strong>Allah</strong>. Yesu<br />
ya ce masa ka faɗi, amma ina ce maku gaban nan za ku ga Ɗan<br />
Mutum a zamne a hannun daman mulki yana zuwa kuma bisa<br />
giza-gizan sama.<br />
Kefas ya mutu shekaru 2,000 da suka wuce ba kuma zai ƙara<br />
rayuwa ba, Kefas ya ga Yesu a kan giciye kuma ya kuma sani cewa Yesu<br />
ya tashi daga mattatu. Yana da kyakkyawan sanin Littafi Mai-Tsarki na<br />
zamaninsa (Tsohon Alkawari), ya san cewa Yesu ya cika dukan kai’dojin<br />
zama Mai-Ceto. A matsayinsa na babban Limami ya kamata Kefas ya san<br />
Zabura 16:10 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
62
<strong>Ga</strong>ma ba zaka bar raina ga lahira ba, ba kuwa zaka bar mai<br />
tsarkinka shi ga ruɓa ba.<br />
Ka duba Matta 27:62-66, Matta 28:11-15 da Daniel 7:13-14.<br />
Abubuwa da yawa na allahntaka suna faruwa a lokacin giciye.<br />
Abubuwan da suka yi daidai da annabcin Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Babu shakka<br />
Kayafa, babban Firist yana sane da annabce annabce da ke cikin Tsohon<br />
Alkawari dangane da zuwan Mai-Ceto, saboda haka ya kamata ya san<br />
cewa Yesu Kristi ne wanda yake zuwa a matsayin babban mai-mulki na<br />
duniya wanda kuma zai kammala shirin shari’a duka.<br />
Bari mu koma kan annabcin nan cewa kowanne ido zai ga Yesu,<br />
za mu san wannan manyan abubuwan da zasu faru a lokacin fyaucewa,<br />
da kuma abubuwan da suka sa kaburbura suka buɗe zasu sa kowanne<br />
mutum ya san cewa Kristi ya zo. Ya yiwu ya zo domin ya kamalla ceton<br />
masu bi, ya yiwu kuma ya zo domin ya kammala hukuncin a kan<br />
waɗanda basu da ceto.<br />
Domin muhimancin ranar fyaucewa, yanzu za mu bincike<br />
waɗansu wurare da suka yi magana da cewa kowa zai ga zuwan Yesu. Za<br />
mu bincike Matta. 24:27-31 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>ma kamar yadda walƙiya ta kan fito daga gabas ana kuwa<br />
ganinta har yamma; hakanan bayanuwar ɗan mutum zata zama<br />
inda gawa ta ke duka can angulai zasu taru. Amma nan da nan<br />
bayan ƙuncin waɗannan kwanaki, rana zata yi dufu, wata ba<br />
zaya bada hasken sa ba, tamraru za su faɗo daga sama, ikokin<br />
sammai za su raurawa; sa’anan dama ta ɗan mutum zata<br />
bayanna a sama. Sa’anan kuma dukan kabilun duniya za su yi<br />
baƙin ciki, za su kuwa ga Ɗan Mutum yana zuwa a bisa gizagizai<br />
na sama tare da iko da ɗaukaka mai girma. Zai kuma aika da<br />
mala’ikunsa su kuma za su tattara zaɓaɓɓunsu daga kusurwoyi<br />
huɗu, daga wannan iyakar sama zuwa waccan.<br />
Waɗannan ayoyin sun koya a fili cewa zuwan Kristi zai kasance a<br />
dukan duniya. Watau, za a ga shaidar cewa za a ganshi a ko’ina cikin<br />
duniya. <strong>Ga</strong>skiyar cewa kabilun duniya suna makoki (aya 30) yayi daidai<br />
da magana kamar, ‘‘kuka da cizon haƙora” da muka samu a waɗansu a<br />
cikin Litafi Mai-Tsarki. Babu shakka dukan abinda ayoyin nan ke faɗa<br />
sun yi daidai da abinda muka koya game da ranar fyaucewa.<br />
Amma mene ne ya sa aka sa aya 28 a cikin wannan nassin? Yana<br />
koyas da cewa akwai gawawaki da zai tara gaggafa. Bisa ga dukan alamu<br />
waɗannan gaggafa sun zo ne domin su ci naman gawawakin da aka<br />
fidda daga kuburbura. Kasancewa gawawakin yana koya mana a fili cewa<br />
lokacin da Littafi Mai-Tsarki yayi Magana game da tashin mattatu na<br />
masu adalci da marasa adalci, babu shakka ba wai yana nufin cewa za a<br />
tada marasa ceto zuwa rai da zasu san ainihin abinda ke faruwa bane. A<br />
63
maimakon haka, yana koya cewa za a tada marasa ceto (jefad da su daga<br />
kaburbura) domin a wulankanta su. Za a kuma kumyatar da su a gaban<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> da dukan halittun sama.<br />
Kumyar da mutum zai sha a gaban <strong>Allah</strong> ta danganta ga zurfin<br />
sanin Maganar <strong>Allah</strong> da mutumin yake da shi. Wannan yana daga cikin<br />
hukuncin da za a yi masa. Dalili ke nan da yasa Yesu yace Kafarnahun<br />
birnin da Yesu yayi aikin al’ajibi na lokaci mai tsawo, amma babu wanda<br />
ya sami ceto, zai fuskanci hukuncin fiye da Sodom. Sodom Maganar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> kaɗan ne kawai ta sani. Mun karanta a Matta. 11:23-24. cewa:<br />
Ya Kafarnahum, kuma ɗaukakar ki har sama za a yi? Hades za ki<br />
gama da cikin saduma aka yi ayyukan masu iko waɗanda aka yi<br />
cikinki, da ta wanzu har yau. Amma in ace maki a cikin ranar<br />
shari’a ƙasar saduma tana da rangwami bisa gareki.<br />
Hakanan, mai wa’azi da bashi da ceto, ko malamin Litafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki yana kuma da rai a ranar shari’a gwargwadon sannin Litafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki da yake da shi, haka kumyar da zai sha zata kasance a gaban<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> da duniya, da kuma gawa lokacin da ya mutu a matsayin hukuncin<br />
da za a yi mashi.<br />
Wani nassi kuma da ya kamata mu duba shine Luka 17:36-37<br />
inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Mutum biyu zasu kasance a gona, za a ɗauki ɗayan a bar ɗayan:<br />
suka amsa suka ce masa, a wanne wuri Ubangiji? Ya ce masu,<br />
inda gawa ta ke nan angulai kuma za su tattaru.<br />
Mutum biyu suna gona. An ɗauke ɗayan. Shi ne mai bi na<br />
gaskiya, an kuma fyauce shi zuwa sama ya zauna tare da Kristi. Mutumi<br />
ɗayan ba shi da ceto, saboda haka aka barshi. Tambayar kuma ita ce, a<br />
ina aka barshi? Amsa ita ce an barshi inda jikin ya ke, gaggafa kuma<br />
suka taru. Idan Liffai Mai-Tsarki yayi Magana a kan<br />
gaggafa”(ɗaya/mufuraɗi), yana Magana ne a kan hukuncin <strong>Allah</strong> mai<br />
zuwa ko kuma ƙaunar <strong>Allah</strong> ta tausayi ga mutanensa. (Kubarwa Shari’a<br />
33:11). Amma idan kalmar nan “gaggafa” jam’i ce, ana amfani da ita ne<br />
domin nuna cewa suna ci kamar angulai ko buzuzu a kan gawa (Matta<br />
24:28). Saboda haka, za mu gane cewa waɗanda aka bari a baya a<br />
lokacin fyaucewa ma’abutan gawayen ne da aka fitar daga kabarbaru.<br />
64
Sura Ta Shida<br />
Masarautar Da Aka Ƙirƙiro Domin Nuna <strong>Ɗaukaka</strong><br />
Da Hikimar Kristi.<br />
Muna binciken Litafi Mai-Tsarki da himma domin mu san ainihin<br />
shirin <strong>Allah</strong> na sharia. Amma akwai tambaya mai muhimanci da bamu yi<br />
ƙoƙarin amsawa ba. Amma kuwa tambaya ce mai muhimmanci da ya<br />
zama tilas mu bincike Litafi Mai-Tsarki mu ga yadda ta bada amsa.<br />
Tambayar itace mene ne NUFIN ALLAH NA HALLITAR DUNIYA KUMA<br />
BAYAN SHEKARU 13, 023 YA HALLAKATA? Kafin mu fara neman amsar<br />
wannan tambaya mai muhimmanci, ya kamata mu koyi abin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
ce game da mulkoki da ikkokin da ya hallita a sama, saboda, zamu duba<br />
waɗannan ayoyin.<br />
Kolossiyawa 1:16 <strong>Ga</strong>ma a cikinsa aka hallita dukan abu cikin<br />
sammai da bisa duniya kuma, abubuwa masu ganuwa da<br />
abubuwa marasa ganuwa, ko kursiyai ko sarauta ko mulkoki ko<br />
ikoki dukan abu ta wurinsa aka hallita su dominsa kuma.<br />
Afisawa 3:10 Domin yanzu ta wurin Ikklisiya hikima iri iri ta<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ta samu ga sarautai da ikoki cikin sammai.<br />
Litafi Mai-Tsarki ya sake Magana game da sarautai da ikoki<br />
masu zuwa a Afisawa 1:21.<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>ba nesa da dukan sarauta, da hukuncin da iko, da mulki, da<br />
kowane suna wanda a ke ambatonsa, ba cikin wannan zamani<br />
kaɗai ba, amma cikin zamani mai zuwa kuma.<br />
Har ila yau akwai ayoyi kima da suka yi magana game da sarauta<br />
da suke da dangantaka da mulkin mutum a duniya da mulki shaiɗan a<br />
duniya.<br />
Romawa 8:38 <strong>Ga</strong>ma na kawas da shakka, ba mutuwa, ba rai, ba<br />
mala’iku, ba sarautai, ba al’amuran yanzu, ba al’amuran na zuwa,<br />
ba ikoki.<br />
Afisawa 6:12 <strong>Ga</strong>ma kokuwarmu ba da nama da jini take ba,<br />
amma da mulkokin da ikoki da mahukuntan wannan zamani mai<br />
duhu, da rundunai masu ruhaniya na mugunta cikin sammai.<br />
Kolosiyawa 2:15 Bayanda ya tuɓe ma kansa mulkoki da ikoki, ya<br />
nuna su a sarari, yana kirari a bisansu cikin wannan.<br />
65
Titus 3:1 Ka tuna masu su yi biyayya ga mahukunta, ga masu<br />
iko, su ji Magana su zama shiryayyu ga kowane kyakkyawan aiki.<br />
Afisawa 6:12 ya yi amfani da kalmar nan ‘‘cikin sammai’’ domin<br />
yana nufin membobin Ikklisiya suna ƙoƙarin bauta wa <strong>Allah</strong>, dukan<br />
zamanin Ikklisiya, yayin da suke ƙalƙashin ikon shaiɗan. Lokacin da<br />
muke sake duba waɗannan ayoyi ya bayyana a fili cewa, <strong>Allah</strong> ya kafa<br />
mulki da ikoki na sammai waɗanda suke cikin cikar mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> na<br />
sama. Ba haka yake ba a da, amma zai ci gaba a nan gaba (Afisawa<br />
1:21).<br />
Idan muna binciken Litafi Mai-Tsarki domin mu san abin da<br />
waɗannan mulkoki da suka taru suka zama mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> gaba ɗaya zasu<br />
yi, zamu sa ran ganin waɗannan:<br />
1. <strong>Allah</strong> ne, kaɗai maɗaukakin sarkin kowanne mulkoki da suka<br />
shafi mulkin <strong>Allah</strong>. (Afisawa 1:19-23).<br />
2. Manufar kowanne ɗan mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> shine ya ɗaukaka <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
3. Zunubi bai shafi mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> ba saboda haka bashi da wuri<br />
a cikin waɗannan mulkoki.<br />
4. ‘Ya’yan mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> ba sa aure basu auraswa (matta 22:30)<br />
5. Mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> mulki ne na har abada kuma ba za a taɓa<br />
hallaka shi ba (Daniel 6:26).<br />
Bayan mun koyi waɗansu daga cikin muhimman abubuwa da aka<br />
gina mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> a kai, mu kan dubi mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> da mamaki kamar<br />
yadda a ke samu a duniya. Ya yi kamar ya saɓawa yadda ya kamata<br />
ikokin da <strong>Allah</strong> zai yi mulki a kai su kasance.<br />
Idan muka duba wannan mulkin a hankali, da yake da nasaba da<br />
duniya, mun ga cewa da farko, muna ganin waɗansu abubuwan na ba<br />
saban ba da suka saɓawa tunanin da muke da shi game da mulkin<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>. Na farko, lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya halicci wannan duniyar mai kyau, ya<br />
sa a cikinta gonar Adnin. Mene ne ya sa <strong>Allah</strong> zai yi haka? Gona (Gonar<br />
Adnin) a cikin duniyar da ke nuna lokacin da mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> (wanda gonar<br />
adnin ke wakilta), zai kasance a duniya mai-zunubi.<br />
Na biyu mene ne ya sa <strong>Allah</strong> da ya halicci wannan duniyar yake<br />
bukatar a yi Aure da auraswa? Wannan zai kawo ƙaruwar ’yan adam,<br />
yadda za a sami biliyoyin mutane da za su harbu da zunubi domin<br />
dukansu suna cikin jikin Adamu.<br />
Na uku, da shike <strong>Allah</strong> ya san tunanin zuciya kafin marmarin<br />
aikata zunubi ya haɓaka (Ibraniyawa 4:12). Zai san burin mala’ikan nan<br />
Lucifer na zama sarki (Ishaya 14:13-14). Mene ne ya sa ya ba Lucifer<br />
damar shiga gonar Adnin?<br />
Daga ƙarshe, mene ne ya sa <strong>Allah</strong>, a cikin wannan sabuwar<br />
duniya marar aibi, ya ba bishiyar suna mai rikitarwa “Itace na sanin<br />
nagarta da mugunta”, ya kuma bari Adamu da Hawa’u suka san da shi ta<br />
66
wurin umurtar su kada su ci daga gare shi, ya kuma sa Lucifer ya san da<br />
shi, da kuma umurnin nan? Amsar tana samuwa a abinda <strong>Allah</strong> ya faɗi<br />
cikin Afisawa 3:10.<br />
Domin yanzu ta wurin Ikkilisiya hikima iri iri ta <strong>Allah</strong> ta samu ga<br />
sarautai da ikoki cikin sammai.<br />
A cikin wannan aya <strong>Allah</strong> ya nuna mana cewa a dukan zamanai da<br />
suka wuce, <strong>Allah</strong> ya halicci tsare tsare daban daban na sammai. Wannan<br />
tsarin zai yi aiki na tsawon shekaru 13,023 zai zama abin kallo wanda<br />
zai nuna hikima da ɗaukakar Ubangiji Yesu Kristi.<br />
Domin cimma wannan, <strong>Allah</strong> ya halicci wata cibiyar samaniya<br />
shekaru 13,000 da suka wuce, ita ce duniyar mu. Wata cibiya ce ta<br />
dabam domin zata kasance da mutane a cikinta da suke aure da kuma<br />
haifar ’ya’ya. Duk da haka, nufin <strong>Allah</strong> ne cewa wannan cibiyar da ta fara<br />
da mutane biyu, Adamu da Hauwa’u, zasu girma su zama biliyoyin<br />
mutane. Dabam take domin ta faɗa ƙarƙashin la’anar <strong>Allah</strong> domin<br />
zunubi yana mulki a ko ina. Ya banbanta domin an nuna shi a fili ga<br />
sauran tsari na sammai da <strong>Allah</strong> ya halitta tun zamanin zamanai. Ya<br />
banbanta domin <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana rana, da wata, da shekarar da zata<br />
shuɗe. Ya banbanta domin karshensa, za a ɗauki mazaunan cikinta<br />
miliyan 200, zuwa sama a matsayin amaryar Kristi su yi mulki da Kristi<br />
na har abada abadin.<br />
Ya banbanta kuma domin yawancin tsawon shekarunsa yana<br />
ƙarƙashin mulkin wani mugun mala’ika da ya faɗi mai suna Lucifer ko<br />
shaiɗan. Bisa ga dokan mallaka, Lucifer yayi nasara bisa ’yan adam ta<br />
wurin samun Hauwa’u da farko, da kuma Adamu su yi wa <strong>Allah</strong> rashin<br />
biyayya. Bisa ga namu hukuncin, ya kamata da <strong>Allah</strong> ya hallaka shaiɗan<br />
nan take domin wannan mummunan abin da ya aikata. Amma <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
barshi ya zama mai mulkin duniya da abinda ke cikinta na tsawon<br />
shekaru 11,000 na kasancewarta. A cikin irin wannan duniyar ne <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ya fara gina mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> a duniya.<br />
Dukan waɗannan tambayoyin da bayanan suna da mana’a domin<br />
Kristi shine Ɗan Ragon da aka yanka kafin kafawar duniya. Wannan ya<br />
tabbatar mana da cewa <strong>Allah</strong> ya zaiyana mulkokin wannan duniya da<br />
sanin cewa zata zama mulkoki na zunubi. Zata zama kuma an tsarata ta<br />
zama mulki wanda yayi dabam da waɗanda <strong>Allah</strong> ya halitta tun zamanin<br />
zamanai.<br />
Amma mene ne ya sa? Mene ne ya sa aka halicce shi dabam da<br />
sauran mulkokin, da ikoki na cikin sammai?<br />
Abu mai-muhimmanci shine, mala’iku da dama sun haɗa baki da<br />
Lucifer lokacin da yake ƙulla maƙarƙashiyar zama sarki. Ta haka<br />
ƙarƙashin la’anar <strong>Allah</strong>, suka zama aljanu, ko kuma shaiɗan ko kuma<br />
muggan ruhohi (Yahuda 6). Sai dai babu wani bayani a Littafi Mai Tsarki<br />
game da yiwa <strong>Allah</strong> tayaswa, sai wannan kaɗai, domin haka yana nuna<br />
67
cewa <strong>Allah</strong> ya bari wannan ya faru domin ya yaɗa nufin <strong>Allah</strong> ga wannan<br />
duniyar.<br />
Kasancewar <strong>Allah</strong> ya sa Lucifer a cikin Gonar Adnin, tun kafin<br />
shaiɗan da kansa ya san yana da burin zama sarki zuciyarsa. Ishaya<br />
14:13-14 da Ibraniyawa 4:13), irin hanyar da <strong>Allah</strong> yake amfani da<br />
miyagu waɗansu lokatai wajen cimma manufarsa. Misalai guda biyu sune<br />
na Nebuchanezzar sarki Babila da ’yan’uwan goma da suka sayar da<br />
Yusufu zuwa bauta (Farawa 50:15, 20).<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya sani sarai cewa biliyoyin mutane tsatson Adamu ne<br />
(Ibraniyawa 7:9-10, Korintiyawa I 15:22). Za a yankewa dukan waɗannan<br />
biliyoyin mutanen hukumcin mutuwa lokacin da Adamu ya yi wa <strong>Allah</strong><br />
tawaye, amma <strong>Allah</strong> ya riga ya yi tanadin ceton mutane miliyan 200.<br />
Domin cimma wannan manufa, da farko <strong>Allah</strong> ya shirya littattafai biyu.<br />
Littafi na farko ya ambaci dukan wanda zai fito daga zuriyar Adamu.<br />
Littafi na biyu da ake kira littafin rai na Ɗan Ragon, yana da sunaye<br />
miliyan 200 a ciki. <strong>Allah</strong> ne da kansa zai ceci waɗannan mutanen a<br />
matsayin Mai-Cetonsu. An ɗorawa <strong>Allah</strong> da kansa, a matsayin na<br />
Ubangiji Yesu Kristi dukan zunuban waɗannan mutanen miliyan 200.<br />
Kuma kasancewa an same shi da laifin waɗannan zunubai, an yanke<br />
mashi hukumcin mutuwar wulakanci a madadin waɗannan mutanen.<br />
Shine Ɗan Ragon da aka yanka tun kafuwar duniya. Alal hakika wannan<br />
mummunar hukunci ya sauko a kan Kristi kafin a halicci wannan duniya.<br />
Mun karanta a cikin IBitrus 1:20 cewa:<br />
Wanda aka rigaya saninsa lallai gaban kafuwar duniya, amma a<br />
ƙarshen zamani ya bayyana sabili da ku.<br />
Mun kuma karanta a Matta 25:34 cewa:<br />
Sa’annan shi Sarkin za ya ce ma waɗannan da ke hannun<br />
damansa, ku zo ku masu albarka na ubana ku gaji mulkin da an<br />
shirya dominku tun kafuwar duniya.<br />
A Timothawus II 1:9-10 kuma, mun karanta cewa:<br />
Wanda ya cecemu, ya kiraye mu kuma da kira mai-tsarki ba<br />
gwargwadon ayyukan mu ba, amma bisa ga nasa nufin da alheri<br />
wanda aka bamu cikin Kristi Yesu tun gaban madawaman<br />
zamani, amma yanzu ya bayyana ta wurin bayanuwar Mai-Ceton<br />
mu Kristi Yesu, wanda ya kawas da mutuwa ya haskaka rai da<br />
dauwama ta wurin bishara.<br />
Ka duba Ibraniyawa 4:3.<br />
Jahannama tana nufin a mutu. A mutu kuma yana nufin rai ya<br />
tafi har abada. Misali a cikin Zabura 16:10, Yesu yace:<br />
68
<strong>Ga</strong>ma ba zaka bar raina ga lahira ba ba kwa zaka bar maitsarkinka<br />
shi ga ruba ba.<br />
Domin ya yi nasara bisa jahannama ransa ya tashi daga mattatu.<br />
An tabbatar da wannan a Romawa 1:4 inda muka karanta cewa:<br />
Aka aiyana shi Ɗan <strong>Allah</strong> da Iko ta wurin Ruhu Mai-Tsarki bisa<br />
ga tashi daga mattatu shi Yesu Kristi Ubangijinmu.<br />
Wannan aya tana kuma koya mana cewa za a kira Kristi Ɗan<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ne kawai domin ya tashi daga kabari (Jahannama). Kristi ba shi da<br />
farko, shi <strong>Allah</strong> madawammi ne tun fil azal. An jadada wannan game da<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> bisa ga abinda <strong>Allah</strong> ya ce a cikin Yohanna 3:16 ‘‘... ya bada dansa<br />
haifaffe shi kaɗai”. Haifaffe yana nufin yana da farko ta yaya <strong>Allah</strong> zai yi<br />
magana cewa Kristi yana da farko?. Yana da farko da shike ya mutu ya<br />
kuma rayu. Ta haka, tunda ya tashi daga mattatu, za a kira shi Ɗan<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>. Ko da shi Kristi, <strong>Allah</strong> Madawammi ne, kafin ya halicci wannan<br />
duniyar, tilas ne ya tashi daga matattu. An tabbatar da wannan a<br />
Ibraniyawa 1:2.<br />
Ƙarshen waɗannan kwanaki ya yi mana magana cikin Ɗansa<br />
wanda ya sanya magajin abu duka, wanda kuma ya yi duniya ta<br />
wurinsa.<br />
Wannan kuma ya tabbatar da cewa an biya cikakken bashin<br />
zunuban zaɓɓaɓu kafin a halicci duniya.<br />
Saboda haka, ya yiwu a yi tambaya cewa: ‘‘Dole ne Kristi ya mutu<br />
sau biyu domin ya biya cikakken bashin zunubanmu? Ka tuna da misalin<br />
nan na tarihi a Fitowa 17:6:<br />
<strong>Ga</strong> shi zan tsaya a gabanka can bisa Pa cikin Horeb, za ka bugi<br />
Pa, ruwa kwa za ya fito daga cikinsa domin mutane su sha. Musa<br />
kwa yayi haka nan a idanun dattiɓai na Isra’ila.<br />
Pa ɗin yana wakiltan Kristi. Musa yana wakiltar dokar <strong>Allah</strong>. Ruwa<br />
yana wakiltar bisharar ceto wadda take samuwa domin an hukunta Kristi<br />
sabili da a cika ka’idar shari’a. A wannan karatun mun ga cewa Musa ya<br />
buga Kristi Dutse, sau ɗaya, shari’a, da kuma ruwan (ceto) suka ɓulɓulo<br />
daga dutsen.<br />
Sai dai, a cikin Littafin Lissafi 20:10-11, Musa ya buga dutse sau<br />
biyu ruwa kuma ya fito. Amma ta haka, Musa ya yi fiye da abin da <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ya umurce shi yayi, saboda haka aka hana Musa damar jagorancin<br />
’ya’yan Isra’ila su ƙetare kogin Urdun zuwa ƙasar alkawari.<br />
Watau, an buga dutsen sau biyu yayinda abinda ake bukata kawai<br />
shine a buga sau ɗaya. An hukunta Yesu sau biyu, ko da shike abinda<br />
69
ake bukata kawai domin cikakken biyan bashin zunubanmu shi ne<br />
hukumci sau ɗaya kawai.<br />
Saboda haka, muna da tabbacin cewa lokaci na biyu da aka hukunta shi<br />
sa’adda yake kan giciye ba domin biyan bashin zunubi ba ne. Kamar<br />
yadda muke koyo, manuni ne na yadda ya biya bashin zunubanmu kafin<br />
halittar wannan duniya.<br />
Zaɓaɓɓu: Mutane Miliyan 200<br />
Abin mamaki, <strong>Allah</strong> cikin hikimarsa ya bamu yawan mutanen da<br />
ya zaɓa domin su sami ceto.<br />
Zamu hakikance da cewa adadin mutanen da <strong>Allah</strong> ya yi shirin<br />
ceto, miliyan 200 ne. Wannan ya haɗa da waɗanda za’a fyauce ranar 12<br />
ga watan Mayu, 2011. A wannan ranar za a tashi jikin kowane mai-bi na<br />
gaskiya wanda ya rayu kuma daga baya ya mutu, zuwa sama ya zauna<br />
tare da Kristi. Haka kuma a wannan lokacin za a ba kowanne mai bi na<br />
gaskiya da yake da rai madawammin jiki rayayye a kuma fyauce shi<br />
ɗungum zuwa sama.<br />
A cikin Ruya ta Yohanna 9:14 an ambce su (masu bi na gaskiya) a<br />
matsayin mala’iku huɗu da aka ɗaure a bakin babban kogin Affaratis.<br />
Yayin da kogin Affaratis yake gudana ta Babila, a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki,<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> yakan kamanta shi da ƙasar Alkawari, kasar Isra’ila (Farawa 15:18;<br />
Kubawar Shari’a 1:7, 11, 24; Joshua 1:4 da sauransu). Kogin ne ya nuna<br />
nisan girman mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> wanda aka kamanta da ƙasar Isra’ila.<br />
Ana kwatanta dukan zaɓaɓɓu wato, waɗanda za’a fyauce, da<br />
mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> amma an ɗaure su a gefen (kogin Affaratis) na mulkin <strong>Allah</strong><br />
amma gaɓar (kogin affaratis) na mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> ya yi masu iyaka. Haka ta<br />
faru ne domin ana danganta su da mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> lokacin da ceton su ya<br />
zama cikakke a lokacin da suka karɓi rayayyun jikunansu. Ana kiran su<br />
mala’iku huɗu ko kuma manzanni huɗu, domin lambar nan huɗu tana<br />
nuna cika. Lambar nan huɗu tana jaddada cewa za’a same su a cikin<br />
dukan duniya kuma ya haɗa har da mutun na ƙarshe da ya sami ceto.<br />
Tilas ne mu koya mu kuma fahimci cewa wannan babban gwaji<br />
na ɗaukaka da hikimar <strong>Allah</strong> zai kasance har abada, saboda ba zai sake<br />
faruwa ba. Mun karanta a cikin Ruya ta Yohanna 1:18.<br />
Ni ne mai rai, na mutu ga shi kuwa ina da rai har abada, ina<br />
kuwa da maɓulɓulai na mutuwa da na kabari.<br />
Kalmar nan “Ina da rai har abada” ya bada tabbacin cewa wannan<br />
abin ba zai sake faruwa ba.<br />
An bada lambar nan miliyan 200 sau biyu. Lambar da aka bayar<br />
a cikin Ruya ta Yohanna 9:16 ita ce ‘‘zambar miliyan dubu maitan’’<br />
(miliyan 200). Daga baya kuma Littafi Mai-Tsarki yace... kuma na ji<br />
70
“lissafin su”. Wannan maganar tana tabbatar mana da cewa <strong>Allah</strong> ne ya<br />
kafa shi kuma zai cika ba da daɗewa ba Farawa 41:32.<br />
Sun hau kan dawakai, ta haka aka danganta su da rundunan<br />
sama da aka misalta a Ruya ta Yohanna 19:11-16 inda muka karanta<br />
cewa:<br />
Sai na ga sama a buɗe ga kuma wani farin doki da mahayansa<br />
ana ce da shi mai aminci da mai-gaskiya, cikin adalci kuwa yake<br />
yin shari’a da yaƙi kuma. Idanunsa harshen wuta ne, bisa kansa<br />
kuma da kambin sarauta masu-yawa, yana kuwa da suna a<br />
rubuce wanda ba mai saninsa sai shi da kansa. Yana yafe da<br />
kuma riga yayyafafiya da jini, sunansa kuma kalmar |<strong>Allah</strong> ne.<br />
Rudunan yaƙi kuwa waɗanda ke cikin sama suka bi shi bisa<br />
fararen dawakai, suna yafe da linin mai labshi, fari fat, maitsabta<br />
kuwa. Daga cikin bakin sa kuma takobi mai- kaifi yana<br />
fitowa, domin shi bubbuga al’ummai da shi, za ya mallake su<br />
kuma da sanda ta ƙarfe. Yana kuwa taka wurin matsewar ruwan<br />
anab na zafin hasalar <strong>Allah</strong> mai-iko duka. A bisa riga tasa da<br />
bisa cinya tasa kuma yana da suna a rubuce SARKIN SARAKUNA,<br />
DA UBANGIJIN IYAYENGIJI.”<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana cewa suna maida hankali kan sulusin ’yan<br />
Adam, kamar yadda muka karanta a cikin Ruya Ta Yohanna 9;15:<br />
Sai aka saki mala’ikun nan huɗu, waɗanda aka tanada saboda<br />
wannan shekara, su kashe sulusin ’yan adam.<br />
A cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki sulusin ’yan adam yana magana ne a<br />
kan masu bi na gaskiya, waɗanda ake samu musamman a cikin Ikkilisiya<br />
duk faɗin duniya Mun karanta a kansu cikin Zakariya 13: 9:<br />
Zan kuma ratsad da kashin nan na uku cikin wuta, in tsarkake<br />
azurfa, in nuna su kamar yadda ake auna zinariya. Za su kira<br />
sunana, ni kwa zan ji su, zan ce mutane na ne su kuma za su ce<br />
Ubangiji <strong>Allah</strong> ne.<br />
Amma da shike nan da nan majami’u suka ridda <strong>Allah</strong> yayi<br />
magana a kansu musamman a cikin littafin Ruya ta Yohanna a matsayin<br />
sulusin da <strong>Allah</strong> zai hallaka.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> yana sa mutane ƙarƙashin fushin <strong>Allah</strong>, a lokacin da suka<br />
karya dokarsa. Karya dokar <strong>Allah</strong> tana yankewa mutane hukuncin<br />
mutuwa. Amma kuma akwai hukunci ga dukan waɗanda suke cewa suna<br />
biyayya ga Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Zai tabbatar da cewa basu yin biyayya da<br />
shike ba a fyauce su ba. Sune sulusin na ’yan adam. Ta haka aka<br />
71
ayyana waɗanda ba a fyauce su ba, kamar yadda muka karanta a cikin<br />
Ruya ta Yohanna 9:17-18:<br />
<strong>Ga</strong> kuwa yadda na ga dawakan a wahayin da aka yi mani,<br />
mahayansu suna saye da sulkuna, launinsu ja kamar wuta, da<br />
shuɗi, da kuma rawaya kamar farar wuta, kawunan dawakan<br />
kuma kamar na zaki, wuta kuma da hayaƙi da farar wuta suna<br />
fita daga bakinsu.<br />
Za a sake kashe waɗanda suke cewa su masu bi na gaskiya ne,<br />
amma aka barsu a baya a lokacin fyaucewa kasancewan suna jimre<br />
fushin <strong>Allah</strong> kamar yadda yake saukowa a ranar shari’a. <strong>Ga</strong> abinda <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ya ke koyarwa a cikin waɗannan ayoyin.<br />
Matta 12:41-42 Nawiyawa za su tashi tsaye a ranar shari’a tare<br />
da wannan tsara zasu kwa kashe ta; gama su suka tuba da<br />
wa’azin Yunana ga kwa wanda ya fi Yunana girma a nan;<br />
sarauniyar kudu za ta tashi tsaye a ranar shari’a tare da wannan<br />
tsara za ta kwa kashe ta; gama daga nisan duniya ta zo garin ta<br />
ji hikimar Solomon; ga kwa wanda ya fi Solomon girma a nan.<br />
Luka 22:30 domin ku ci ku sha tare da ni cikin mulki na, kuma<br />
zaku zamna bisa kursiyai kuna yin shari’a bisa kabilun Isra’ila<br />
goma sha biyu.<br />
Waɗannan duka suna cikin abinda masu ilimin tauhidi suke<br />
magana akai yayinda suke batun Armaggeddon. A lokacin an rigaya an<br />
fyauce mayaƙan masu adalci, mutanen majami’u zasu yi ta kuka da<br />
cizon haƙora (Matta 8:11-12; 13:42, 50; 22: 13; 24:51; 25:30, Luka<br />
13:28) domin an barsu a baya.<br />
Miliyoyin Waɗanda Basu Da Ceto, Sun Mutu Basu Da Masaniya A Kan<br />
Fushin <strong>Allah</strong><br />
Abin da ya bamu mamaki shine, mun koya cewa yawancin<br />
mutanen da basu da ceto waɗanda suka mutu ko kuma zasu mutu kafin<br />
ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011, basu ji ko kuma sanin cewa fushin<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> yana bisa kansu domin zunubansu ba. Ta yaya wannan zai<br />
kasance? Mun koya cewa fushin <strong>Allah</strong> yana nan ta fannoni da dama. Ya<br />
kuma ƙunshi waɗannan:<br />
1. Babbar kunya.<br />
2. Kisa (Mutuwa, Jahannama)<br />
3. Rasa ’yancin wannan rayuwa.<br />
72
4. Asarar gadon rai na har abada, tare da asarar gadon sabuwar<br />
sama da sabuwar duniya.<br />
5. Mutuwa ta har abada inda ba za’a ƙara rayuwa ba.<br />
Yayin da dukan waɗannan hukuncin zasu sauko kan wanda bashi<br />
da ceto, mutumin yakan mutu ba tare da ya san cewa mutuwarsa<br />
sakamakon zunubi ne a rayuwarsa ba. Idan shi ɗan Ikkilisiya ne ya yiwu,<br />
ya gaskanta da koyarwar nan irin ta al’ada cewa, masu zunubi za su<br />
shiga jahannama inda zasu sha azaba ta har abada. Amma wannan ba<br />
abin damuwa ba ne a gare shi domin ya hakikance da cewa an maye<br />
haihuwarsa, kuma shi cikakken ɗan Ikkilisiyar ne.<br />
A hakikanni gaskiya rayuwar yawancin ’yan Ikkilisiya yawancin<br />
lokaci kuma a rayuwar waɗanda basu cikin Ikkilisiya sun gaskanta da<br />
cewa mutuwa wani lokaci ne mai daraja na zuwa ƙasa mafi kyau. Ta haka<br />
ake kallon mutuwa a matsayin nasara ko da shike ta haɗu da baƙin ciki<br />
domin rabuwa da ƙaunatattu da kuma abubuwan jin daɗi da mutumin<br />
yake morewa a wannan rayuwar.<br />
Sai dai, marar ceto da ya mutu, to ya yi mutuwa ta har abada. Ba<br />
zai taɓa ɗanɗana hukuncin <strong>Allah</strong> da sanin sa ba. <strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne a lokacin<br />
fyaucewa, za a fidda gangan jikinsa da aka sa a kabari a kunyace, <strong>Allah</strong><br />
da kuma ’ya’yan mulkin sama zasu kunyata shi. Amma marar ceton da<br />
ya mutu ba zai san abinda ke faruwa ba. <strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne yayi asarar gadon<br />
haihuwarsa, rai na har abada da gadon sabuwar sama da sabuwar<br />
duniya. Amma bai san wannan yana faruwa ba.<br />
Bugu da ƙari lokacin da waɗannan mutane suke raye koyaushe<br />
akwai babban jin daɗi da murna. Sun ɗanɗana abubuwa kamar ƙaunar<br />
iyali da jin daɗin rayuwa a duniya mai kyau. Saboda haka, rai da mutuwa<br />
suna da kyau ko da shi ke ba su taɓa samun ceto ba. To ina fushin <strong>Allah</strong><br />
a kan waɗannan mutane da basu taɓa samun ceto ba? Sai kace mun<br />
ɓata hanya a fahimtar tsarin shari’a na <strong>Allah</strong>. Amma bamu ɓata hanya<br />
ba. A maimakon haka, muna koya cewa, babban abinda duniyar nan ta<br />
fi maida hankali a kai ba kan shirin ceto na <strong>Allah</strong>, ko kuma shirin<br />
shari’a na <strong>Allah</strong> ba ne. A bisa hikima da ɗaukakar <strong>Allah</strong> ne. Ka tuna mun<br />
koya cewa dalilin da yasa <strong>Allah</strong> ya halicci ’yan adam ya sasu a duniya<br />
shine domin ya samar da gagarumin hoto mai kusurwa uku inda dukan<br />
ikoki da mulkoki na sammai zasu ga babbar hikima da ɗaukakar <strong>Allah</strong>,<br />
yayin da <strong>Allah</strong> yake shirin aikin ceto cikin fiye da shekaru 13,000 da aka<br />
shafe ana aikata zunubi.<br />
Saboda haka muka tarar, misali, cewa <strong>Allah</strong> yana gaba da mai<br />
zunubi (Zabura 5:5), kasancewa fushinsa na Allantaka yana bisa kanshi,<br />
duk da haka jinƙansa da girma yake zuwa ga hallittun sa duka har da<br />
masu zunubi. Mun karanta a cikin Matta 5:45 cewa:<br />
73
Domin ku zama ’ya’yan ubanku wanda ke cikin sama; gama ya<br />
kan sa rana tasa ta fito ma miyagu da nagargaru, yakan aiko da<br />
ruwa bisa masu adalci da marasa adalci.<br />
Ka yi tunani a kan manyan albarkun dake ƙulɓulowa daga hasken<br />
rana mai kyau da ruwan sama dake yiwa duniya baye. Waɗanda ba a<br />
zaɓe su zuwa ceto ba, zasu ci moriyar waɗannan albarkun dai dai da<br />
waɗanda suke da ceto.<br />
An bayyana rahamar da Kristi yake da ita ga dukan ’yan adam a<br />
wurare biyu cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki inda muka karanta cewa Yesu yayi<br />
kuka: Mun karanta waɗannan kalmomin masu sosa rai a cikin Yohanna<br />
11:33-35:<br />
Sa’adda Yesu ya ganta tana kuka, Yahudawa kuma waɗanda suka<br />
zo tare da ita suna kuka, ya ji haushi cikin ruhunsa, yana jin zafi<br />
a ransa, ya ce ina kuka ajiye shi? Suka ce masa Ubangiji ka zo ka<br />
gani, Yesu yayi kuka.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> madawammi, Ubangiji Yesu ya nuna tausayinsa mai-girma<br />
da cewa mutuwa ta shigo wannan duniya. Mun karanta a cikin Luka<br />
19:41-44 cewa:<br />
Sa’adda yayi kusa, ya hangi birni yayi kuka a kanta, ya ce da ma<br />
kin sani a cikin wannan rana, har ke ma, abinda ya tabbata ga<br />
salama, amma yanzu a ɓoye ya ke a idanunki. <strong>Ga</strong>ma kwanaki<br />
zasu abko maki inda maƙiyanki zasu gina maki ganuwa su sa ki a<br />
tsaka su tsare ki daga kowanne sasa, su fyaɗe ki a ƙasa, da<br />
’ya’yanki a cikinki ba zasu bar ko dutse ɗaya bisa wani a cikinki<br />
ba. Da shike ba ki lura da kwanakin ziyartanki ba.<br />
Urushalima da Littafi Mai-Tsarki yake magana a kai a nan ta<br />
ƙunshi dukan Isra’ila da dukan majami’u waɗanda suke wakiltar mulkin<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> a duniya, suka kuma ridda. Saboda haka membobin su suna kan<br />
hanya zuwa jahannama. Sun yi wa <strong>Allah</strong> ba’a. Sun tsara shirinsu na ceto.<br />
Sun murɗa Littafi Mai-Tsarki da sauransu.<br />
Duk da haka Kristi yana ta kuka domin tilas ya sauko da cikakken<br />
fushinsa bisan su. Muna iya ganin irin ɗaukakar da Kristi yake da ita,<br />
yayinda, ta wurin kuka kan Urushalima, ya nuna jinƙansa zuwa garemu<br />
da mulkoki da ikokin a sammai?. Ba abin mamaki ba ne da <strong>Allah</strong> yace,<br />
kamar yadda muka karanta cikin Ezekiel 33:11, “Bani da wani jin daɗi<br />
cikin mutuwar mugu ba’’<br />
Mulkoki da ikoki a duk faɗin samaniya sun shaida wannan. Sun<br />
ga duniyar da ta shafe shekaru 11,000 ƙarƙashin mulkin mugun<br />
mala’ikan nan da ake kira shaiɗan. Sun bayyana yadda mutane ƙalilan<br />
suka sami ceto, mutane takwas lokacin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya gargaɗi duniya game<br />
74
da hallaka mai zuwa a zamanin Nuhu. Suna ganin bangaskiyar Ibrahim,<br />
da rashin bangaskiyar ’ya’yan Isra’ila, da suka hallaka a cikin jeji domin<br />
rashin bangaskiya. Sun shaida yadda Asuriyawa da ƙasar Yahuda da<br />
kuma Babila suka hallaka ƙasar Isra’ila domin muguntar ta.<br />
Ta yaya Kristi zai tafiyad da duniyar dake da biliyoyin mutanen<br />
mattatu cikin ruhaniya waɗanda shaiɗan ne yake mulkinta?<br />
Ta yaya Kristi zai sarrafa duniyar da kowanne mutumin da ke cikinta<br />
yake matacce cikin ruhaniya, kasancewa shi bawan zunubi ne da kuma<br />
shaiɗan?.<br />
Ta yaya <strong>Allah</strong> zai tafiyadda da duniya da aka la’anta wurin da<br />
mutanen da ke cikinta la’antattu ne, daga cikinsu za a ɗebi kaɗan su<br />
zama mutanen <strong>Allah</strong>?<br />
Wuri na ƙarshe da za a maida hankali a kai shine Ikkilisiya ta har<br />
abada, mutanen nan miliyan 200 da sunayen su ke cikin littafin rai na<br />
Ɗan Rago. Ta yaya zasu zauna a ciki a kuma fitar da su daga biliyoyin<br />
miyagun mutane da shaiɗan yake mulki bisan su, wanda yake gaba da<br />
Kristi?<br />
Ta yaya <strong>Allah</strong> zai tafiyad da duniyar da yawancin mutanen da ke<br />
cikinta mattatu cikin ruhaniya, waɗanda shiɗan yake mulki a bisansu,<br />
amma a cikin wannan duniyar akwai mutane ƙalilan da aka yi niyar ceto<br />
amma ba su tuba ba, da kuma waɗanda basu tuba ba?<br />
An halicci duniyar mu domin ta nuna hikima da ɗaukakar <strong>Allah</strong> a<br />
cikin mawuyacin yanayi. Ana ganin cikar bayanuwar ɗaukakarsa ganin<br />
cewa <strong>Allah</strong> da kansa ya zama Mai-Ceto.<br />
Cikin waɗannan duka, mulkoki da ikoki, sun shaida jinƙai, da<br />
alheri, da gafara, da haƙurin <strong>Allah</strong>. Sa’annan suka shaida sake haihuwa.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya ɗauki jikin mutune ya zo duniyan nan da kansa domin ya nuna<br />
yadda ya sha wahala kafin kafuwar duniya a madadin mutanen nan<br />
miliyan 200 da ya zo ya ceta.<br />
Sun ganshi a matsayin malami mai tawali’u wanda bai daina<br />
zama <strong>Allah</strong> maɗaukaki ba. Sun ganshi lokacin mutane suka raina shi<br />
suka ƙi shi. Sun gan shi ya jimre mutuwar wulakanci, da kunya mafi<br />
girma, yayinda aka aiwatar da hukumcin kisa na la’ana yayinda yake bisa<br />
giciye.<br />
Sun kuma ga jinƙansa mai-ban al’ajibi lokacin da ɗan fashin dake<br />
gangansa a kan giciye ya kada baki yace ‘‘Ubangiji ka tuna da ni lokacin<br />
da ka shiga mulkinka” (Luka 23:42). Nan take dab da ƙarshen rayuwar<br />
mutumin nan, suka shaida yadda ya sami cikakken gafara.<br />
Sun shaida ɗaukakar tashin Kristi, da kuma ceton kusan mutane<br />
3,000 lokacin da aka sauko da Ruhu Mai-Tsarki. Ina misalin ɗaukakar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>, sun kuma ga ɗaukakarsa yayin da suke ganinsa a cikin dukan<br />
waɗannan ayyukan.<br />
Haka kuma ’yan Adam, waɗanda suke zaune a wannan duniyar<br />
sun sami damar shaida hikima da ɗaukakar Kristi ta wurin karanta<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki a hankali.<br />
75
Amma duniya zata zo ranar da za’a fara shari’a, 21 ga watan Mayu,<br />
2011. Fiye da mutane biliyan 6.5 za su kasance a duniya lokacin zasu<br />
kuma shiga kwanakin nan 153 na shari’a, kuma zasu sani ba tare da<br />
tambaya ba cewa suna ƙarƙashin fushin <strong>Allah</strong> domin zunubansu.<br />
Yawancinsu zasu sani lokacin da suke fuskantar fushin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Mene ne ya kawo canji nan da nan? Sune mutanen da suka shafe<br />
shekaru 13,000 suna zaune a nan duniya cikin salama. Amma idan suna<br />
raye ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011, Za a yi wata babbar girgizar ƙasa<br />
farat ɗaya da zata kashe yawancinsu, (Ruya ta Yohanna 16:18). Mutuwa<br />
zata kasance a ko’ina, za a yi fama da ciwo mai tsanani da azaba a<br />
ko’ina.<br />
Mun karanta game da banbanci ga waɗannan mutane a cikin<br />
Luka 12:45-48:<br />
Amma idan bawan nan ya ce cikin zuciyarsa, Ubangijina yana<br />
jinkirin zuwa, har ya tasar ma dukan ma’aikata, maza da mata ya<br />
ci, ya sha ya yi maye, Ubangijin wannan bawa zaya zo cikin ranar<br />
da ba ya sa tsammani ba, cikin sa’a wanda baya sani ba, za ya<br />
raba shi a tsaka, ya sanya masa rabonsa tare da marasa- aminci.<br />
Wannan bawa kwa wanda ya san nufin Ubangijinsa, baya shirya<br />
ba, za’a duke shi dayawa; Amma wanda ba ya sani ba, ya kwa yi<br />
abinda ya isa duka, za’a duke shi kaɗan. Kuma dukan wanda an<br />
ba shi dayawa za’a nemi dayawa a gareshi, wanda kwa an sanya<br />
masa dayawa a hannu, a wurinsa za’a fi biɗa.<br />
Muna rayuwa a zamanin da <strong>Allah</strong> ya bayyana ainihin lokacin da<br />
duniya zata ƙare. An ba duniya wannan bayanin kuma mutanen duniya<br />
suka ƙara sani, domin marasa ceto su iya yin kuka ga <strong>Allah</strong> domin<br />
jinƙai. Ya yiwu mutane da yawa kamar mutanen Nineveh a lokacin<br />
Yunana, za su sami jinƙan <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
A hakikanin gaskiya, a lokutan da suka gabata an sha jin koyaswa<br />
cewa ranar kaza da kaza duniya zata shuɗe. Kuma a gaskiya dukan<br />
waɗancan lokatan ba daidai ba ne. Amma a yau faɗakarwar da ake yi a<br />
kan lokacin dawowar Kristi da kuma ranar shari’a ya banbanta da na<br />
kwanakin baya. Ayoyin da aka ambata a baya sun nuna gagarumin<br />
muhimmancin kasa kunne ga faɗakarwar ƙarshen lokaci da Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki yake bayarwa. Misali an haɗa da waɗannan batutuwa a cikin<br />
gargaɗin:<br />
1. Littafi Mai-tsarki baki ɗaya dokar <strong>Allah</strong> ne, kuma kowacce<br />
kalma daga ainihin harshen ta fito ne daga bakin <strong>Allah</strong> kai<br />
tsaye. Saboda haka ya kamata majami’a da duniya su sani<br />
cewa Littafi Mai-Tsarki shine mafi iko duka, fiye da wani iko<br />
da aka sani a lokutan baya. Tilas ne a saurare shi a kuma yi<br />
biyaya da shi.<br />
76
2. Akwai shaidu da dama a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki, dangane da<br />
ranar 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011, da 21 ga watan Octoba, 2011<br />
da suka tabbatar da sahihancin waɗannan ranakun. Wannan<br />
bayanai ne masu yawa da duniya bata taɓa sani ba, kuma ya<br />
shafi dukan duniya.<br />
3. Wannan bayanin lokacin yana samuwa a ko’ina cikin duniya a<br />
yanar gizo da kuma gajeren zango na tashar radio. Akwai shi<br />
kyauta a harsuna da yawa da za a iya aikawa ga dukan wanda<br />
ya rubuto ko ya kira ya tambaya. Ya kamata kowa ya sani.<br />
4. Mutane suna ba’a da wofinta wannan bayani, yayinda da<br />
dama kuma suke musun gaskiyar bayanan.<br />
5. Waɗanda ba a fyauce su ba ranar 21 ga watan Mayu. 2011,<br />
zasu mutu a ranar ko kuma wani lokaci kafin ranar 21 ga<br />
Octoba, 2011. A lokacin dukan duniya zata yi gobara idan<br />
aka mutu, babu kuma wani sanin fushin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Sai dai idan ba mutuwa ta auku ba, akwai babban fahimtar<br />
fushin <strong>Allah</strong>, kuma waɗanda suke raye, zasu ci gaba da zama ƙarƙashin<br />
zafin aloba da zata mamaye duniya a lokacin ranar shari’a kwanakin nan<br />
na 153 daga 21 ga watan Mayu, 2011, zuwa 21 ga watan Octoba, 2011,<br />
zasu yi matsanancin fama da waɗannan abubuwa:<br />
1. Kunya da la’anar zama ƙarƙashin fushin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
2. Sanin cewa murna da ta’aziya da dai sauransu na wannan<br />
duniya ya ƙare.<br />
3. Sanin cewa basu da gado nan gaba. Mutuwa ce kawai take<br />
jiransu, kuma wannan zai faru ne kafin 21 ga watan Oktoba,<br />
2011.<br />
4. Waɗanda suke raye a lokacin zasu yi fama da ciwo da raɗaɗi<br />
na jiki.<br />
5. Sanin cewa babu wani jinƙai daga wurin <strong>Allah</strong>. Hallakar<br />
wannan duniya ita ce abu na ƙarshe na tarihi da mulkoki da<br />
ikoki na cikin sammai zasu shaida. Duka ya nuna ɗaukaka da<br />
hikimar <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Wannan gabatarwa na fushin <strong>Allah</strong> mai tsanani abin ban tsoro ne.<br />
Ya zama abin ban tsoro musamman idan muka tuna cewa zai faru ne na<br />
’yan watanni kuma zai faru babu jinkiri.<br />
Amma ka yi tunanin irin jinƙan <strong>Allah</strong>. Zai iya kawo ranar<br />
fyaucewa, da ranar sharia ta wurin zuwa kamar ɓarawo da dare, daga<br />
nan yawancin mutane na duniya zasu zama babu faɗakarwa ta kowacce<br />
iri. Amma <strong>Allah</strong> a cikin yalwar jinƙansa, yana bamu lokacin faɗakar da<br />
duniya game da hukunci mai zuwa. Abin baƙin ciki shine zai zo kamar<br />
ɓarawo da dare ga waɗanda suke musun sanin wannan domin basa son<br />
duniyar nan ta ƙare.<br />
77
Har wayau, <strong>Allah</strong> ya bada misalin tsohon birnin Nineveh a cikin<br />
littafin Yunana. Basu san komi ba game da Littafi Mai-Tsarki, kuma suna<br />
da kwana 40 ko kuma ƙasa da haka da zasu ɗauki mataki game da<br />
wannan gargaɗin. Ya kamata mu koyi darasi daga gare su.<br />
1. Suna da cikakken imani ga <strong>Allah</strong>, basu jayayya da <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
2. Sun bincike kansu da aminci, sun gane cewa su masu zunubi<br />
ne kuma sun cancanci fushin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
3. Sun bayyana a fili girman tawali’un su ta wurin zaunawa a<br />
cikin tsummoki da toka. Haka yake ga bawan mafi tawa’iu da<br />
jami’i mafi girma da mafi daraja, sarki.<br />
4. Sun juyo daga zunubansu, kuma nan da nan suka yi ƙoƙarin<br />
rayuwar da zata gamshi <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
5. Basu nemi komi a wurin <strong>Allah</strong> ba, amma suka yi kuka ga<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> suka ce watakila <strong>Allah</strong> zai canza tunaninsa, kuma ba<br />
zai hallaka su ba.<br />
Ya kamata mu maida hankali sosai ga abinda mutanen zamanin<br />
Nuhu suka yi, lokacin da aka gargaɗe su, game da hallaka mai zuwa.<br />
Abin tsoro ne a karanta yadda aka kwatanta hallakar zamaninmu da na<br />
zamanin Nuhu. Mun Karanta a cikin Matta 24:37-3 cewa:<br />
Kuma kamar yadda kwanakin Nuhu suke, haka nan kuma<br />
bayanuwar Ɗan mutum zata zama; <strong>Ga</strong>ma kamar yadda suna ci,<br />
suna sha suna amre, suna amraswa a cikin kwanakin da ke<br />
gaban ruwan rigyawa, har randa Nuhu ya shiga cikin jirgi, ba su<br />
sani ba, har rigyawa ta zo ta kwashe su duka, haka nan kuma<br />
bayanuwar Ɗan mutum zata zama.<br />
Abu ɗaya ya zama tabbas. Matakin da ya kamata a ɗauka kuma<br />
wanda yake da amfani game da hallakar dake tafe ita ce canza burina, da<br />
tunani na da niyya ta, da shiri na da bege na a nan duniya. Nan da nan,<br />
ya kamata in sani cewa abinda ya kamata ya zama da muhimmanci da<br />
zan maida hankali a kai shine cewa a cikin ’yan watani ƙalilan wannan<br />
duniya zata zo ƙarshe. A cikin waɗannan watannin da suka rage wanne<br />
abu ne mafi muhimmancin ga rayuwata da ta iyalina? Hakika bashi da<br />
wata nasaba da ganin cewa rayuwata a nan duniya tana da daɗi.<br />
A hakikanin gaskiya idan ni mai bi ne na gaskiya, dole in sani<br />
cewa a matsayi na na mai-tsaro, dole in damu da cewa ba iyalai na<br />
kaɗai ba, amma dukan duniya sun san da wannan labari mai ban tsoro<br />
na hallaka duniya.<br />
Watau, idan har gaskiyar gabatowar ƙarshen zamani bai sani na<br />
sake tunani da tafiyar da harka ta ba, ya kamata in amsa wannan<br />
tambaya: Shin na gaskata gaskiyar Littafi Mai-Tsarki cewa ranar 21 ga<br />
78
watan Mayu, 2011 ita ce ranar fyaucewa da kuma farkon ranar sharia?<br />
Ka tuna da faɗakarwar Luka 12:47.<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ɗaya ne jiya da yau, da har abada (Ibraniyawa 13:8).<br />
Mutanen Nineveh sun nuna mana hanya, kuma ya kamata mu bi<br />
ta hanyar yanzu da shike mun sani ba tare da wata tambaya ba cewa<br />
ranar shari’a tayi kusa. <strong>Allah</strong> ya yi bayani da tabbacin cewa yau ana<br />
ceton ɗumbin mutane da ba wanda zai iya ƙirgawa (Ruya ta Yohanna<br />
7:9-14). <strong>Allah</strong> ya nace da cewa shi ba mai tara bane (Romawa 2:11).<br />
Saboda haka akwai babban bege gare ka. Kana da babbar dama kamar<br />
kowane mutum a cikin duniya na zama zaɓɓaɓe na <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Ka fara karanta Littafi Mai-Tsarki kana kuma addu’a cewa ko<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> zai taimake ka ka ƙara zama mai biyyaya da shi sosai. Ka roƙi <strong>Allah</strong><br />
ya sa ka zama mai tawali’u. Don kawai shafe shekaru kana aikin fasto<br />
ko kuma kai memban Ikklisiya mai aminci, ba zai saka ka same<br />
tagomashi na samun ceto ba. Babu wani wuri na alfarma. Kuma ya yiwu<br />
majami’ar ka ko fasto, ko shaidar bangaskiya sun zama allahnka, domin<br />
duk wani abinda muka dogara gareshi ya zame mana allah.. Ya kamata<br />
dogararmu ta kasance a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki kaɗai. Ko da shike akwai<br />
abubuwa da dama a cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki da ba mu fahimta ba, tilas ne<br />
mu fahimci cewa duka ya fito ne daga bakin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Kada ka daina kuka zuwa ga <strong>Allah</strong> domin neman jinƙai. Amma<br />
kayi haka kana la’akari da cewa babu ɗaya daga cikin mu da ya cancanci<br />
jinƙan <strong>Allah</strong>. Saboda haka zamu je gareshi, muna roƙo, muna nema ‘ya<br />
Ubangiji ko yana iya yiwuwa ni ma in sami ceto.<br />
79
Sura Ta Bakwai<br />
Ceto<br />
Su wane ne ko ina masu zunubin suke waɗanda ba za’a jefa su<br />
cikin jahannama ba? Babu wanda ya sani. Lokacin kawai da zamu iya<br />
hakikance cewa muna ɗaya daga cikin zaɓɓaɓu na <strong>Allah</strong> shine lokacin da<br />
mu ka karɓi sabon ruhu rayayye daga wurin <strong>Allah</strong>. Lokacin da wannan ta<br />
faru, zamu sani ne kawai domin <strong>Allah</strong> ya zaɓe mu mu sami ceto, kuma<br />
ya rigaya ya tanada dukan komai domin cetonmu. Za mu sani cewa<br />
cetonmu gaba ɗaya alheri ne da jinƙan <strong>Allah</strong> kuma babu wani abu da<br />
muka yi da ya kaimu ga samun cetonmu.<br />
Idan <strong>Allah</strong> ya ba mutum sabuwar zuciya da sabon ruhu (Ezekiel<br />
36:26), <strong>Allah</strong> yana shirya wannan mutumin ne domin ya zauna tare da<br />
shi har abada. Sabuwar zuciya ko sabon ruhu, wanda muke kuma kira<br />
sabon ruhu rayayye, yana sake rayuwar mu yadda zamu yi marmarin<br />
aikata nufin <strong>Allah</strong>. Bugu da ƙari, mukan damu ƙwarai idan muka aikata<br />
zunubi, amma zai iya yiwuwa mu aikata zunubi domin muna cikin jiki<br />
wanda ba a cece shi ba. Saboda haka kafin mu zama ’ya’yan sabuwar<br />
sama da sabuwar duniya, za’a kuma bamu sabon ruhu rayayye. <strong>Allah</strong> zai<br />
iya ba dukan wanda <strong>Allah</strong> ya zaɓa sabon ruhu, a kowanne lokaci na<br />
rayuwar zaɓɓaɓen mutumin. Zai iya zama kafin haifuwa ko kuma minti<br />
ɗaya kafin mutuwa. Aiki ne wanda <strong>Allah</strong> ya shirya gaba ɗaya.<br />
Amma zai faru ne lokacin da zaɓaɓɓen mutumin yake ƙarƙashin<br />
jin maganar <strong>Allah</strong> (Romawa 10:17). Shi ya sa muke ƙoƙarin ƙarfafa<br />
kowane mutum a duniya ya saurari Littafi Mai-Tsarki. A gaskiya ma,<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> ya ɗokace mu da mu aika da maganar <strong>Allah</strong> cikin dukan duniya,<br />
domin kowa ya kasance ƙarƙashin jin Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
A sa mutane a cikin yanayin jin maganar <strong>Allah</strong> shine sa su<br />
ƙarƙashin dokar da <strong>Allah</strong> ya ba ’yan adam su yi biyayya ga Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki. Yin biyayya da Littafi Mai-Tsarki yana bukatar mu karanta ko mu<br />
saurari Littafi Mai-Tsarki. An umurce mu da mu sami ceto. An umurce<br />
mu mu tuba daga zunuban mu. An umurce mu, mu yi addu’a domin<br />
jinƙan <strong>Allah</strong>. An umurci wanda bashi da ceto yayi ƙoƙari ya shiga mulkin<br />
<strong>Allah</strong> (Luke 13:24). Wannan kalmar “ƙoƙari” daga kalmar Helenanci ce<br />
wadda take nufin raɗaɗi. Kamar mai tsere ne wanda yake fama domin ya<br />
yi nasara a tsere.<br />
Nan ne abin alajibi na ceto yake. Domin <strong>Allah</strong> ya halicci mutum a<br />
cikin kamanni da surarsa, ko da shike mutum mattace ne a ruhaniya, zai<br />
yi ƙoƙari da dukan ƙarfinsa ya bi umurnin <strong>Allah</strong>. Saboda haka zai saurara<br />
a hankali ya ji maganar <strong>Allah</strong> yana ƙoƙari yayi biyayya da umurnin <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Yadda <strong>Allah</strong> ya ke danganta wannan ƙoƙari wani abu ne wanda ya fi<br />
gaban ganewarmu. Babu shakka bai kamata mu gaskanta da cewa<br />
ƙoƙarin da muke yi na shiga mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> wani abin yabawa ba ne ko<br />
80
kaɗan. Ko kuma cewa ƙoƙarin da nake yi zai bani wani tabbaci da cewa<br />
zan sami ceto.<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne cewa ta wurin ƙoƙarin da nake yi zan ƙara sanin<br />
littattafan dokokin <strong>Allah</strong> wato Littafi Mai-Tsarki. <strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne a cikin<br />
ƙoƙari na, zan ƙara neman nufin <strong>Allah</strong>, maimakon nawa nufin. <strong>Ga</strong>skiya<br />
ne cewa a cikin ƙoƙari na zan ƙasƙantar da kaina in yi kuka ga <strong>Allah</strong><br />
domin jinƙan sa. <strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne a cikin ƙoƙarin da zan ƙara gane cewa dole<br />
ne in dogara ga Ubangiji, idan shirinsa ne ya cece ni. <strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne cewa a<br />
cikin ƙoƙari na ina da bege mai-girma cewa nima zan yi zama ɗaya daga<br />
cikin zaɓɓaɓu na <strong>Allah</strong>. <strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne cewa a yau, <strong>Allah</strong> yana ceton ɗumbin<br />
mutane da babu mai-iya ƙirgawa, kuma ya yiwu ni ma a zaɓe ni a cikin<br />
waɗannan mutanen.<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne kuma cewa <strong>Allah</strong> yana mulki akan masu ceto da<br />
marasa ceto. Watau <strong>Allah</strong> yana iya sa wanda ba shi da ceto ya aikata<br />
nufinsa daga lokaci zuwa lokaci, ko da shi ke <strong>Allah</strong> ba shi da shirin ya<br />
cece wannan mutumin. Hakanan yayinda mutumin da bashi da ceto<br />
yake ƙoƙarin shiga mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> dukan abinda ya aikata da ya kasance<br />
biyayya da <strong>Allah</strong>, ya yiwu <strong>Allah</strong> ne yake aiki a cikinsa ko da shike ba ya<br />
cikin waɗanda <strong>Allah</strong> ya zaɓa. Ko kuma watakila ƙoƙarin wannan<br />
mutumin ne, yayi biyayya ga <strong>Allah</strong>, ko kuma ya haɗa duka da aikin <strong>Allah</strong><br />
da aikin mutumin. <strong>Allah</strong> ne kaɗai ya san daidai abin da yake faruwa a<br />
cikin rayuwar mutumin.<br />
Amma duka wannan aikin <strong>Allah</strong> ne. Mutunin da bashi da ceto ba<br />
zai iya sanin ko aikin <strong>Allah</strong> ba ne ko na shi ne yake shafar rayuwarsa.<br />
Abinda kawai zai iya tabbatarwa shine idan ya sami ceto to ya kasance<br />
ne gaba ɗaya aikin Kristi ne. A cikin Joel 2:12-13 mun karanta cewa:<br />
Amma ko yanzu, in ji Ubangiji ku juyo mani da dukan zuciyarku,<br />
tare da azumi da kuka da baƙin ciki, ku tsaga zukatanku ba<br />
tufafinku ba, ku juyo wurin Ubangiji <strong>Allah</strong>nmu, gama shi mai<br />
alheri ne, cike da juyayi, mai jinkirin fushi, mai yalwar jinƙai, yana<br />
sake nufinsa a kan masifan da ya shirya.<br />
Idan wanda ba shi da ceto ya gane cewa yana ƙara gaba da<br />
zunubi kuma ya fi murna lokacin da yake aikata nufin <strong>Allah</strong>, yana kuma<br />
da marmari da sha’awa yayi biyayya da dukan umurnin Littafi Mai-<br />
Tsarki, watakila, Ruhun <strong>Allah</strong> ne yake shaida tare da nasa ruhun cewa ya<br />
sami ceto.<br />
Dole mu tuna cewa <strong>Allah</strong> yana da ’yanci ya umurci ’yan adam suyi<br />
biyayya da dokokinsa. Domin an halicci ’yan adam a cikin sura da<br />
kamanin <strong>Allah</strong>, ɗan adam kamar <strong>Allah</strong> da kansa yana ƙarƙashin dokar<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>, Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Idan mutum yana zaune a cikin duniyar nan<br />
kuma bai taɓa jin komai daga Littafi Mai-Tsarki ba, tilas ne <strong>Allah</strong> ya<br />
shirya ma wannan mutum hanyar da zai kasance ƙarƙashin jin Littafi<br />
81
Mai-Tsarki idan mutumin yana ɗaya daga cikin zaɓaɓɓu na <strong>Allah</strong>.<br />
Wannan zai iya faruwa a kowanne lokaci cikin rayuwar mutumin.<br />
Duk da haka Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya damu ƙwarai game da waɗanda<br />
suka karanta Littafi Mai-Tsarki, ko suka ji umurnin <strong>Allah</strong> da kunnuwansu<br />
amma ba su jin Littafi Mai-Tsarki. Ta yaya wannan zai kasance? Mun<br />
kwatanta cikin Kubawar Sharia 28:45 cewa:<br />
Kuma dukan waɗannan la’anoni za su sauko maka, su bi ka, su<br />
cimmaka, har ka hallaka; domin ba ka lura da muryar Ubangiji<br />
<strong>Allah</strong>nka ba, da zaka kiyaye dokokinsa da farillansa waɗanda ya<br />
umurce ka da su.<br />
Mun kuma karanta a cikin Irimiya 29:17-19 cewa:<br />
In ji Ubangiji mai runduna, ga shi zai aika masu da takobi, da<br />
yunwa da alloba, in maishe su kamar munanan ɓaure, waɗanda<br />
ba su ciyuwa domin muninsu. Zan runtime su da takobi, da<br />
yunwa da aloba, in bashe su domin a yi shillo da su a cikin<br />
dukan mulkokin duniya, su zama abin la’ana, abin al’ajibi,<br />
abin reni, abin zargi, a cikin dukan al’ummai inda na kore su,<br />
don basu kasa kunne ga zantattukana ba, in ji Ubangiji, waɗanda<br />
ina aike masu da su ta bakin bayina annabawa, ina assubanci ina<br />
aikansu: amma kun ƙi ji, in ji UBANGIJI.<br />
Kalmar nan “kasa kunne” a cikin waɗannan gargadi guda biyu,<br />
waɗanda suka yi kama da yawancin faɗakarwar da aka rubuta a cikin<br />
Littafi Mai-Tsarki, yana nufin a ji a kuma yi biyayya. <strong>Allah</strong> yana koya<br />
mana cewa idan muka ji maganar <strong>Allah</strong> dake cikin Littafi Mai-Tsarki da<br />
kunnuwan mu amma bamu yi ƙoƙari mu yi biyayya da abin da muka ji<br />
ba, daidai yake da rashin jin maganar <strong>Allah</strong>. waɗannan mutane sun sa<br />
kansu da gangan a waje daga inda <strong>Allah</strong> yake ceto. Ra’ayin da suke da<br />
shi na ceto ko kuma waɗansu koyarwa na Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya hana su<br />
ƙasƙantar da kansu su ji su kuma yi marmarin biyayya da umurnin da<br />
gaskiyar Littafi Mai-Tsarki.<br />
Duk da haka akwai bege kyakkyawan bege ga waɗanda suka ƙasƙantar<br />
da kansu suka amince da zunubansu, suka kuma juyo daga tunanin da<br />
suke da shi a da, suka yi ƙoƙarin biyayya da dukan Littafi Mai-Tsarki,<br />
kuma suka ƙaskantar da kansu suka yi kuka ga <strong>Allah</strong> domin jinƙan sa.<br />
<strong>Ga</strong>skiya ne Littafi Mai-Tsarki ya koyar da cewa fushin <strong>Allah</strong> yanzu<br />
yana kan kowacce majami’a da suke samuwa a duk faɗin duniya.<br />
Majami’u ne wakilan mulkin <strong>Allah</strong> a duniya na tsawon shekaru 1,955.<br />
Abin baƙin ciki shine, suna amfani da sunan <strong>Allah</strong> suka riƙa koyarwa sun<br />
kuma ci gaba da koyarwar da ta saɓawa koyarwar Littafi Mai-Tsarki,<br />
suna cewa Littafi Mai-Tsarki ne tushen koyarwarsu. Daɗin daɗawa,<br />
shaiɗan ne a maimakon Kristi, mai mulkinsu na ruhaniya. A yau, babu<br />
82
wani bege ga wata Ikklisiya da ke cikin dukan duniya. Ana shirya<br />
waɗanda suka rage a cikinsu zuwa shiga ranar shari’a.<br />
Juyowa ne kawai daga yanayin bautar shaiɗan cikin ruhaniya da<br />
kuma gujewa daga majami’u da kuma zuwa da karayar zuciya ta<br />
ruhaniya ga <strong>Allah</strong> na Littafi Mai-Tsarki kuma su zama ƙarkashin jin<br />
maganar <strong>Allah</strong>, shine begen kowane mutum.<br />
BARI ALLAH YAYI MANA JINƘAI<br />
83
FARAWA<br />
2:17 44<br />
15:18 28,70<br />
25:29-24 33<br />
41:32 71<br />
50:15 68<br />
50:20 68<br />
FITOWA<br />
17:6 69<br />
LITTAFIN LISSAFI<br />
20:11 38<br />
KUBAWAR SHARI’A<br />
1:7 70<br />
11:24 70<br />
21:17 33<br />
28:16-68 68<br />
28:20 40<br />
28:45 40,82<br />
33:11 64<br />
JOSHUA<br />
1:4 70<br />
7:18-26 54<br />
ALKALAWA<br />
2:16 2:16<br />
ISAMAILA<br />
8:20 22<br />
IISAMA’ILA<br />
1:19 14<br />
1:24 14<br />
2:5 14<br />
ƊAUKAKA GA ALLAH<br />
Jerin Ayoyi da shafi<br />
18:33 15<br />
AYUBA<br />
4:20 30<br />
ZABURA<br />
5:5 11<br />
7:8 23<br />
7:11 23<br />
9:19 23<br />
16:10 42,62<br />
26:1 23<br />
51:5 11<br />
67:4<br />
72:1-4 23<br />
103:6 23<br />
119:106 17<br />
MAI WA’AZI<br />
8:5-6 8,13,17<br />
8:5-7 V<br />
ISHAYA<br />
10:23-26 30<br />
14:13-14 66<br />
40:2 38<br />
53:12 41<br />
54:7-8 43<br />
55:7-8 43<br />
57:20 26<br />
IRMIYA<br />
7:33-82 52<br />
17:18 28<br />
29:17-19 82<br />
46:28 30<br />
84<br />
EZEKIEL<br />
3:17 V<br />
18:20 24<br />
18:23 10<br />
18:32 10<br />
33:2-7 18<br />
33 3<br />
33:2-7 18<br />
33:11 15<br />
37 51<br />
37:4-5 52<br />
37:12-13 51<br />
DANIEL<br />
6:26 66<br />
7:13-14 56<br />
12:2 51<br />
12:4 52<br />
12:9 51<br />
JOEL<br />
2:12-13 81<br />
3:9-16 55<br />
YUNANA<br />
4:11 70<br />
NAHUM<br />
1:6 30<br />
1:8 30<br />
3:5-6 53<br />
ZACHARIA<br />
13:9 71<br />
MALACHI<br />
4:1 30
MATTA<br />
3:17 37<br />
4:24 31<br />
5:44 14<br />
5:45 73<br />
7:22-23 52<br />
8:6 26<br />
8:11-12 30,44,52,71<br />
11:23-24 61<br />
12 22,23<br />
12:36 23<br />
12:41 32,47<br />
12:41,42 70<br />
13:42 30,41,71<br />
13:49-50 30,52<br />
13:50 30,52<br />
20:18 39<br />
22:36,37-40 13<br />
24:27-31 60,61<br />
24:28 61,62<br />
24:37-39 76<br />
24:57 71<br />
25:30 30,71<br />
25:34 32<br />
26:39 66<br />
26:63-64 39<br />
27:19 61<br />
27:46 39<br />
27:51-53 39<br />
27:62-66 39<br />
28:11-15 61<br />
MARKUS<br />
4:39 49<br />
4:41 49<br />
5:13 27<br />
9:43-44 29<br />
11:14 36<br />
15:28 37<br />
LUKA<br />
2:48 32<br />
3:6 37<br />
10:29-37 14<br />
12:45-48 76<br />
12:47 79<br />
13:24 80<br />
13:26-28 56<br />
13:28 34<br />
15:31 33<br />
16 31,41<br />
16:22 31<br />
16:23 31<br />
16:24 24,32<br />
16:25 31<br />
17:36-37 56<br />
19:41-44 15<br />
21:22 19<br />
22:30 72<br />
23:4 38<br />
23:22 39<br />
23:42 75<br />
23:43 43<br />
23:46 39<br />
YOHANA<br />
1:14 11<br />
1:18 37<br />
1:51 58<br />
3:16 69<br />
5:28-29 51<br />
11:33-35 74<br />
11:50-51 39<br />
14:21 11,12<br />
19: 7 39<br />
19<br />
19:6<br />
AYYUKAN MANZANI<br />
1:6 9,3,18<br />
1:6-8 v<br />
1:7 18<br />
1:7-8 18<br />
1:8 18<br />
1:11 58<br />
20:38 31,32<br />
86<br />
24:15 51<br />
ROMAWA<br />
1:4 36,42<br />
2:11 79<br />
5:12 45<br />
6:23 11,41<br />
8:38 65<br />
10:17 80<br />
14:10-11 23<br />
14:12<br />
I KORINTHIYAWA<br />
6:2-3 54<br />
15:22 26,45<br />
15:26 27,31<br />
15:44 52<br />
15:51-52 45<br />
II KORINTHIYAWA<br />
5:10 8,23<br />
5:21 45<br />
GALATIYAWA<br />
2:30 40<br />
3:13 40<br />
AFISAWA<br />
1:19-23 66<br />
1:21 66<br />
2:5 45<br />
3:10 65<br />
3:10-11 44<br />
6:12 65<br />
KOLOSIYAWA<br />
1:16 65<br />
1:17 36<br />
1:18 36<br />
2:10 65<br />
2:13 45<br />
2:15 65<br />
ITASSALUNIKAWA<br />
4:13-17 45
5:1-4 21<br />
5:2 8<br />
5:2-6 19<br />
II TASSALUNIKAWA<br />
1:10 44<br />
2:11 43<br />
ITIMOTHAWUS<br />
3:15 4<br />
II TIMOTHAWUS<br />
1:9 37<br />
1:9-10 37<br />
TITUS<br />
3:1 56,66<br />
IBRANIYAWA<br />
1:2 36<br />
1:5 37<br />
4:3 36<br />
4:12 66<br />
4:12-13 11<br />
7:9-10 68<br />
10:4-7 38<br />
11:7 55<br />
12:16-17 33<br />
12:29 29,34<br />
13:8 79<br />
YAKUB<br />
2:10 9<br />
I BITRUS<br />
1:20 37<br />
2:12 54<br />
2:22 45<br />
4:17 19<br />
II BITRUS<br />
2:8 31<br />
3:10 29,8<br />
I YOHANNA<br />
3:9 45<br />
YAHUDA<br />
6 67<br />
13 26<br />
RUYA TA YOHANNA<br />
1:7 58<br />
1:18 68<br />
2:26 54<br />
3:9 54<br />
3:10 7<br />
86<br />
7:4-8 54<br />
7:4-14 15<br />
9:1-21 44<br />
9:5 27<br />
9:14 75<br />
9:15 76<br />
9:17-18 76<br />
11:10 27<br />
13:7 43<br />
13:8 27<br />
14:10 8<br />
16:10-11 56<br />
16:18 28<br />
17:14 56<br />
18:6 26<br />
19:11-16 68<br />
19:19-21 56<br />
18:8 29<br />
19:20 28<br />
20:10 28<br />
20:11-13 25<br />
20:12 23<br />
20:13 23<br />
20:14 23,24<br />
20:14-15 28<br />
21:1 27<br />
21:8 28